JP6581001B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited. In the following, a role related to paying out game media (medals, etc.) (internal winning combination, display combination) is referred to as a “small role”, a role related to replay is referred to as a “replay role”, and the bonus game is activated. The combination is called “bonus combination”.

  Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) has been developed. Furthermore, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”). A gaming machine is also being developed.

  The gaming machine described above generally includes a main control unit that performs control such as reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. Conventionally, a gaming machine in which the sub control unit performs effect control based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various triggers of the gaming operation controlled by the main control unit.

JP 2011-254920 A

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect according to various triggers of gaming operations is known. Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that produces an effect (rotation start sound) with the start of rotation of the reel is known. In this technical field, there has been a demand for the development of a gaming machine that can execute a new effect using this effect.

  The present invention has been made to meet the above-described demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a new effect using an effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation. is there.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor described later) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S described later) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal lottery processing described later) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels to be described later) are displayed. Stepping motors 61L.61C, 61R),
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process described later) for stopping the change display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means;
Informing means (for example, a display device 11 and a push order instruction display unit described later) for informing information that gives an advantageous state for the player;
When a predetermined condition is established, a notification game determination means (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery process described later) that can determine a transition to a notification game state (for example, a pseudo bonus state described later) that can be notified by the notification means for a predetermined period. )When,
A lock effect execution means (for example, a reel lock process described later) capable of executing an effect to generate a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in a unit game;
Fluctuation start effect execution means (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) for performing a specific effect (for example, output effect of rotation start sound described later) indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display of the plurality of display rows; ,
Data transmission means (for example, a main control circuit unit 41 described later) for transmitting data relating to operations during the game (various commands described later);
Production control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, and controlling execution of the specific production by the variation start time production execution means based on the received data (for example, reel production start production described later) Data set processing), and
In a game in which an effect for generating a specific lock (for example, a short lock described later) by the lock effect execution means is not generated, after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is digested, the effect control means When the data indicating the start of variation display of the display row (for example, a reel rotation start command described later) is received, the variation start time effect executing means executes the specific effect,
In a game in which an effect of generating the specific lock by the lock effect execution means is performed after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed, the effect control means starts the specific lock When the data indicating the above (for example, the below-described effect instruction command (at the start of the reel effect)) is received, the change start effect executing means executes the specific effect.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect is an effect of generating a sound indicating the start of variation display at the start of variation display of the plurality of display rows,
The execution timing of the specific effect in the game where the effect that generates the specific lock is performed is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect in the game that does not generate the effect that generates the specific lock. Good.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to perform a new effect using the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition flow figure of the production game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game operation | movement in the unit game in one Embodiment of this invention, and the transition timing of a production | presentation game state. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the various stop positions of the reel of the pseudo | simulation bonus start spinning effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production aspect of the rotation start sound at the time of the long weight effect performed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for BB game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery table (mode 0-3: setting 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery table (modes 4-7: setting 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of present game simulation RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of the present game simulation RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of present game simulation BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of present game simulation BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of next game simulation RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of next game pseudo RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of next game simulation BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock | lottery lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of next game simulation BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 0-3: pseudo RB, setting 1) at the time of a pseudo bonus start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 4-7: pseudo RB, setting 1) at the time of a pseudo bonus start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 0-3: pseudo BB, setting 1) at the time of a pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 4-7: pseudo BB, setting 1) at the time of a pseudo bonus start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 0-3) in pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (modes 4-7) in pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode change lottery table at the time of a setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the corresponding | compatible table of the next pseudo | simulation bonus transfer game number and random number value in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus start pseudo | simulation BB stock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus medium pseudo BB stock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo RB start) at the start of a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB start) at the start of a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB + freeze A start) in the one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB + freeze B start) at the start of the pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight lottery table at the time of a pseudo | simulation bonus start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation | occurrence | production game lottery table (without 1G continuous in pseudo RB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation | occurrence | production game lottery table (no 1G run in pseudo BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation | occurrence | production game lottery table (with 1G continuous in pseudo RB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation | occurrence | production game lottery table (with 1G continuous in pseudo BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight lottery table during pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area (Internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order flag storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect game state storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery state storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a response | compatibility with the main winning combination name and sub winning combination name in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the sub effect flag used by the effect control in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. In the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of command data transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit. In the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a configuration of effect instruction command data transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit. It is a main flowchart (processing at the time of power-on) which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the initialization process at the time of power activation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the electric power interruption reset process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of lever on in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the mode transfer lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel production lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel rotation start process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel production execution time process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel lock process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel automatic stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a pseudo | simulation bonus display in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo | simulation bonus initialization process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 3rd post-stop production process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of constant speed start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of adjustment sound command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of credit information command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the production instruction command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting process of the production data for the reel production start time in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be exemplified as a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing”. Provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi-slot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) in a specified period of 190 msec is determined for four symbols.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, within a specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols), the symbol combination is as much as possible along the effective line. Stop reel rotation as shown. In addition, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  As described above, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning a prize, a reward such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  In addition, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of gaming operations, various images are displayed using video display by a display device, light output by various lamps, sound output by various speakers, or a combination thereof. Production is performed.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for presentation is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the pachislot of the present embodiment is functionally mainly composed of a main control unit that controls various operations related to the progress of the game and the various operations, a sub-control unit that produces a game, and a main control. And a gaming machine housing for mounting the sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main board) to be described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected thereto. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-board) described later and various peripheral devices controlled by the sub-control circuit (including various display devices such as a display device, a speaker, a lamp group, and a reel backlight). Below, the content of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. A handle 7 is provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 7 on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that can be put on by the carrier when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet 2a. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality (for example, 20) of symbols (identification information) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. Although not shown, the reel body is provided with a backlight (so-called reel backlight) for irradiating the back surface of the sheet material with light. The reel backlight is turned on and off under the control of a sub-control circuit 42 described later.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a display device 11. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged in a matrix. And this display apparatus 11 produces (notifies | reports) with the dot pattern represented by lighting and extinction of several LED. For example, the display device 11 also performs a lighting effect of an image of a specific pattern (notification lamp described later: not shown) for notifying (notifying) a pseudo bonus winning described later. The display device 11 shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention, and the display device 11 may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device.

  Below the display device 11, there is provided a display window section 4 constituted by three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively. Hereinafter, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.

  Each display window shows a specific example of the symbol display area according to the present invention, and is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping the three reel arrangement areas when viewed from the front (player side), and are positioned in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided as follows. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R through the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  In this embodiment, each display window has three (predetermined number of) consecutively arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reel when rotation of a corresponding reel provided behind the display window stops. ) Is set to a size that can be displayed. That is, the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas are provided in the frame of each display window, and one symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbols of the reels can be displayed in a 3 × 3 array form on the display window 4 constituted by the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not a pseudo line (virtual line) set from the left display window 4L to the right display window 4R is won in the symbol displayed in the 3 × 3 arrangement form is determined whether or not the prize is won. It is defined as a line to be determined (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”). In the present embodiment, a virtual line (hereinafter referred to as “cross-down line”) connecting the upper area of the left display window 4L, the middle area of the middle display window 4C, and the lower area of the right display window 4R is used as an effective line. .

  Hereinafter, a virtual line connecting the middle area of the left display window 4L, the middle area of the middle display window 4C, and the middle area of the right display window 4R is referred to as a “center line”, and the upper area and middle display of the left display window 4L. A virtual line connecting the upper area of the window 4C and the upper area of the right display window 4R is referred to as a “top line”, and connects the lower area of the left display window 4L, the lower area of the middle display window 4C, and the lower area of the right display window 4R. A virtual line is referred to as a “bottom line”, and a virtual line connecting the lower region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the upper region of the right display window 4R is referred to as a “cross-up line”.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is configured by a frame-like member in which an opening for exposing the display device 11 is formed.

  A lamp group 21 composed of a plurality of LEDs or the like is provided on the upper frame portion, the lower frame portion, and both side frame portions of the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the production contents. For example, information (for example, the number of the pressing order) indicating the pressing order of the stop buttons (reel stopping order) during AT operation is displayed on a part of the lower frame portion. That is, in the lower frame portion of the front panel 10, push order navigation is performed. The turning on / off operation of the lamp group 21 is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  A pedestal 12 is provided at the approximate center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 BET button 15, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit. Note that the amount exceeding the preset number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit function). This credit function shows a specific example of the game medium storing means according to the present invention.

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 composed of 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 6 has the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as “paid-out number”), the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as “credit number”). Information such as the number of inserted medals for playing a game (hereinafter referred to as “BET number”) is digitally displayed.

  Further, although not shown in the figure, the pedestal unit 12 is a push for displaying information on the type of push order flag stored in a push order flag storage area, which will be described later, that is, information on the type of reel stop order to be notified during AT operation. A forward instruction display unit is provided. The push order instruction display unit shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

  The push order instruction display unit can be configured by a display device including, for example, a plurality of lamps and LEDs. Note that the display mode of the information related to the push order flag by the push order instruction display unit can be configured in any manner as long as the type of the push order flag can be identified. For example, the push order instruction display unit may be composed of a plurality of lamps, and the information on the type of the stop order of the reels may be notified by associating the turn-on / off pattern of the plurality of lamps with the push order flag type. Further, for example, information indicating the stop order of the reels directly (for example, the stop order number) may be displayed by the push order instruction display unit.

  The display operation of the push order instruction display unit is controlled by the main control circuit 41. It should be noted that the information regarding the type of the stop order of the reels notified by the push order instruction display unit during the AT operation indicates the pressing order of the stop buttons notified by the lamp group 21 provided in the lower frame part of the front panel 10. There is a one-to-one correspondence with the information shown.

  In the present embodiment, the display area (area) of information regarding the stop order of the reels in the push order instruction display section is smaller than the area (area) where the lamp group 21 reports the press order, and the pedestal section. 12 is not formed on the same plane as the display window 4 for visually recognizing the reel. Therefore, the player can play the game without being aware (visually) of the push order instruction display unit.

  Further, if the information about the stop order of the reels by the push order instruction display unit and the notification of the press order by the lamp group 21 are executed before the pseudo bonus winning announcement effect (notification lamp lighting effect) described later, the player However, it will be recognized before the announcement that the pseudo bonus has been won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the interest of the game, the timing of displaying the information about the stop order of the reels by the push order instruction display unit and the notification of the press order by the lamp group 21 is set after the end of the pseudo bonus winning announcement effect described later. It is preferable. Furthermore, since it is common to think that navigation starts when a pseudo bonus is started, a specific symbol combination (hereinafter referred to as “BIG alignment” or It is preferable that after the “REG alignment”) is automatically stopped (pseudo-stop), display of information on the reel stop order by the push order instruction display unit and notification of the press order by the lamp group 21 are executed. For example, triggered by a production instruction command generation process (S244, S250, etc. in FIG. 97 described later) and a transmission process, which will be described later, and information on the reel stop order displayed by the push order instruction display unit, and pressed by the lamp group 21 You may make it the structure that the alerting | reporting of order is performed.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents. The speakers 20L and 20R are specific examples of the sound output unit, the change start time effect executing unit, the payout time effect executing unit, or the settlement time effect executing unit according to the present invention.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is configured by a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member (a box-shaped member) whose one surface on the front side is opened. A main board 31 on which a later-described main control circuit 41 (see later-described FIG. 4) is mounted is provided in the upper portion of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of the presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4 described later) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Is done.

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as “hopper 33”) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. In addition, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot 1 is provided on one side of the hopper 33 (on the left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) in the cabinet 2a. The hopper 33 is a specific example of the game medium payout means according to the present invention.

  A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 described later) is mounted is provided on the back surface of the front door 2b (the portion opposite to the display screen). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects using the display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, a reel backlight (not shown), and the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 (see FIG. 2) is appropriate. To guide. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 4 described later) is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Configuration of circuits provided in pachislot>
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachislot 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) that are electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly configured by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  Connected to the main CPU 51 are a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56 and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, and each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). ) Is detected. The start switch 16S is a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 14S is a specific example of the settlement operation detection means according to the present invention.

  The medal sensor 35S is a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 13 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 12S detects that a bet button (MAX bet button 14 or 1BET button 15) has been pressed by the player (BET operation).

  As peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle based on the number of output pulses. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R show a specific example of the variation display means according to the present invention.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels the number of symbols is). Only managed).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is changed to “1”. "Is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the medals discharged from the hopper 33 have reached a predetermined payout number. The main control circuit 41 is connected to an external terminal board 18S, and the hall computer / calling device 100 is connected to the external terminal board 18S. That is, the main control circuit 41 is connected to the hall computer / calling device 100 via the external terminal board 18S.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, and an amplifier 93.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number for determining the effect content is extracted, and the effect content (effect data) An effect registration task for determining and registering an image, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, and a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21 In addition, a program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, BGM (background music) and effects Various storage areas are included such as a storage area for storing sound data relating to sound and a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, peripheral devices such as the display device 11, the speakers 20 </ b> L and 20 </ b> R, and the lamp group 21 are connected to the sub control circuit 42. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the contents of the presentation, and the created video is displayed on the display device 11. Is done.

  The sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, D / A converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effects. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<RT gaming state and bonus gaming state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, various RT gaming states and bonus gaming states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, and transition flows between these gaming states will be described. To do.

  In the present embodiment, two types of states, RT0 gaming state and RT1 gaming state, in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to replay are different from each other are provided as the RT gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as a bonus game, and the main control circuit 41 also manages the game state (BB game state) of the BB game. Note that “BB” is a so-called accessory continuous operation device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a so-called first type special accessory, and continuously operates “RB”.

  The RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is, for example, an RT gaming state set when the pachislot 1 is shipped or initialized. In the RT0 gaming state, the number of medals for each unit game (one game) is three. That is, in the RT0 game state, a game of three cards is played.

  In the present embodiment, when BB (big bonus) is won (established) in the RT0 gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state as shown in FIG.

  The RT1 game state is a game state in which games of various effect game states described later are executed, and the actual game executed by the player is performed in the RT1 game state. In the RT1 gaming state, a game of three cards is played.

  In the RT1 gaming state, reel stop control is performed so that the BB won in the RT0 gaming state does not win. That is, in the RT1 gaming state, reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination related to BB is not stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, the game in the RT1 gaming state is executed in the gaming state in which the BB is carried over (internally winning state), and the RT1 gaming state is a so-called “BB flag state”.

  When BB wins (actuates) in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the BB gaming state as shown in FIG. In the BB game state, a game of three is played, and the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 90. When BB ends, as shown in FIG. 6, the gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

<Various production game conditions>
[Transition flow between various playing game states]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, an outline of various effect game states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment and the transition flow between the various effect game states will be described.

  As described above, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has an AT function. Whether or not the AT function is activated is determined by lottery by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the operation / non-operation state of the AT function (AT game period). That is, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) manages a game state in which the AT function is activated and a game state in which the AT function is inoperative in terms of the game effect.

  In the following, the privilege of operating the AT function is referred to as “pseudo bonus”, and the non-operating game of the AT function is referred to as “normal game”. In addition, a state in which the AT function is activated is referred to as a “pseudo bonus state”, a state in which the AT function is not activated is referred to as a “normal gaming state”, and these states are collectively referred to as a “production gaming state”.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a pseudo bonus, a pseudo bonus (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB”) in which an AT function operation period (AT game period) is 70 games, and an AT function operation period is 20 games. Two types of pseudo bonuses of a pseudo bonus (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo RB”) are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a pseudo bonus state (notification game state), a pseudo bonus state in which a pseudo BB is performed (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB state”) and a pseudo bonus state in which a pseudo RB is performed (hereinafter, “ "Pseudo RB state"). Hereinafter, the game content performed in each effect game state mentioned above and the transition between various effect game states are demonstrated.

  In a normal game, a pseudo bonus lottery is performed for each unit game. Then, when the pseudo BB is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, and a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB (described later “BIG alignment”) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by the pseudo bonus start spinning effect described later (FIG. 7). In FIG. 7, the effect gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the pseudo BB state (first AT state). At this time, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state through the notification waiting state and the waiting for waiting state described later, or the waiting for waiting state. Transition (transition modes 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

  Also, in a normal game, a pseudo RB is won by a pseudo bonus lottery, and a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo RB (described later “REG alignment”) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by a pseudo bonus start spinning effect described later. Then (in FIG. 7, described as “pseudo RB winning”), the effect gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the pseudo RB state (second AT state). At this time, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state through the notification waiting state and the waiting for waiting state described later, or the waiting for waiting state. Transition is made (transition modes 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

  In the pseudo BB state, an AT game in which one set is 70 games is performed. During the game period in the pseudo BB state (including the start game of the pseudo BB), a stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, during the game period of the pseudo BB state, the pseudo BB game of 70 games ends without winning the stock lottery, and the pseudo bonus is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo BB. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect gaming state shifts from the pseudo BB state to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game period (including the start game of the pseudo BB), when the stock lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the next game after the end game of the current set of pseudo BB During a pseudo bonus start spinning effect described later, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB (described later, “BIG alignment”) automatically stops on a predetermined virtual line, and then the pseudo BB game is continued. A so-called pseudo BB in a continuous form called “1G ream” (hereinafter also referred to as “renso” form) is started. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a reel lock effect such as freeze may occur before the pseudo bonus start spinning effect.

  Also, when the pseudo BB continues in 1G series, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, in the period from the third stop of the end game of the current set of pseudo BB to the start of normal rotation of the reel of the next game The effect gaming state returns to the pseudo bonus state again from the pseudo bonus state via the notification waiting state and the alignment waiting state described later (the pseudo bonus notification in transition mode 6 from transition mode 6 in FIG. 8 described later). Mode to shift to a game).

  In addition, even if the pseudo BB game ends without winning the stock lottery during the pseudo BB game period, the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo When RB) is won and started, the game of pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo RB) is continued as shown in FIG. When the pseudo bonus continues in this manner, it is not shown in FIG. 7, but in detail, from the third stop of the end game of the current set of pseudo BB to the start of normal rotation of the reel of the next game. In the period, the effect gaming state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again through the normal gaming state and the waiting state to be described later (the transition from transition mode 5 in FIG. 8 described later to transition mode 3). Embodiment).

  In the pseudo RB state, an AT game in which one set is 20 games is performed. During the game period of the pseudo RB state (including the start game of the pseudo RB), stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, in the game period of the pseudo RB state, the game of the pseudo RB of 20 games is finished without winning the stock lottery, and the bonus game is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect gaming state shifts from the pseudo RB state to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo RB game period (including the start game of the pseudo RB), when the stock lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the next game after the end game of the current set of pseudo RB During a pseudo bonus start spinning effect described later, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB (a “BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line, and then the pseudo bonus game is continued (1G A series of pseudo BBs are started). Note that even when the 1G-series pseudo BB is started after the pseudo RB is finished, a reel lock effect such as freezing may occur before a pseudo bonus start spinning effect described later.

  In addition, when the pseudo BB is started in 1G after the pseudo RB is finished, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, after the third stop of the end game of the current set of pseudo RBs, In the period up to the start of rotation, the effect gaming state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again via the notification waiting state and the alignment waiting state described later (from transition mode 6 to transition mode in FIG. 8 described later). 2) A mode of shifting to the pseudo bonus notification game in No. 2).

  In addition, in the pseudo RB game period, even if the pseudo RB game ends without winning the stock lottery, the first game unit game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB wins and starts the pseudo BB. When played, the pseudo RB game is continued as shown in FIG. When the pseudo bonus continues in this manner, it is not shown in FIG. 7, but in detail, from the third stop of the end game of the current set of pseudo RB to the start of normal rotation of the reel of the next game. In the period, the effect gaming state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again through the normal gaming state and the waiting state to be described later (the transition from transition mode 5 in FIG. 8 described later to transition mode 3). Embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, in the pseudo bonus unit game, when a 1G run of pseudo BB stock lottery is won, a notification sound (BGM) is generated to notify that the 1G run of pseudo BB has been won. In the generation effect of the notification sound (BGM), the BGM may be changed every time the stock of the 1G series of pseudo BBs is determined in the game period of one set of the pseudo bonus.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is internally determined whether or not the 1G series pseudo BB is performed after the end of the pseudo bonus of the current set. Can be added. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain an interest in the player's AT operation.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the continued form of the pseudo bonus to be stocked (the consecutive resort form) is only the 1G series, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the 1G ream, after the pseudo bonus is ended in a state where the stock of the pseudo bonus exists, for example, after the game is temporarily shifted to the normal game state and the normal game for a predetermined period (predetermined number of games) is consumed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a pseudo bonus in a continuous form (so-called continuation form via a precursor) in which a game of the stored pseudo bonus is executed can be stocked.

[Transition form of staging game state within the unit game period]
Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a transition form of the effect game state in the unit game (one game) period will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game operation in the unit game and the transition timing of the effect game state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal gaming state and the pseudo bonus state (pseudo BB state and pseudo RB state) are provided as the effect gaming state managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the state of various effects performed during the transition from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo bonus is won, in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus, an effect (“pseudo bonus start spinning effect” in FIG. 8) for notifying the winning of the pseudo bonus is provided. Done. In this pseudo bonus start spinning effect, notification (notification lamp lighting), reel rotation start and reel automatic stop are performed in this order. Then, in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, the reel operation control and the instruction to turn on the notification lamp to the sub control circuit 42 are executed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). The notification lamp is a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the state in which the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is performed as the effect game state. As will be described later, in the automatic stop effect of the reel, finally, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus on the predetermined virtual line set on the three reels (described later, “REG alignment”, “BIG Since a symbol combination called “alignment” is automatically stopped (aligned), the state in which the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is performed is hereinafter referred to as a “match waiting state”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, not only a type in which the pseudo bonus is started in the winning game but also a type in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game of the winning game is provided as the winning type of the pseudo bonus. Yes. In the latter case, the state between the winning of the pseudo bonus and the generation of the notification effect of the next game is a waiting state for the notification effect (the effect of lighting the notification lamp). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also has a state between the winning of the pseudo bonus and the occurrence of the notification effect of the next game (hereinafter referred to as “notification waiting state”) as the effect game state. to manage.

  Hereinafter, the contents of the various transition modes (transition modes 1 to 6 in FIG. 8) of the various effect gaming states described above in the unit game will be described.

(1) Transition form 1
The transition form 1 in FIG. 8 is a transition form of the effect gaming state when the pseudo bonus lottery is not won in the normal game.

  In the transition mode 1, first, in the normal game state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player ("lever" operation in FIG. 8), the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed (in FIG. 8). "Pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery)" operation). If the pseudo bonus lottery is not won, the effect gaming state does not change and the normal gaming state is maintained. Thereafter, the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is digested (“wait digest” operation in FIG. 8).

  Next, the reel is started to rotate by a normal acceleration process (“real start” operation in FIG. 8) and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels are completely stopped ("third stop end" operation in FIG. 8), one game of the normal game when the pseudo bonus lottery is non-winning (losing) is finished. In these series of game operations, the effect game state does not change and the normal game state is maintained. That is, in the normal game of the transition mode 1, the effect game state does not change during the period of one game, and the normal game state is maintained.

(2) Transition form 2
In the present embodiment, four types referred to as “current game simulation RB”, “current game simulation BB”, “next game simulation RB”, and “next game simulation BB” as pseudo bonus types to be won in the standard game pseudo bonus lottery. Are provided (see FIGS. 38 and 39 to be described later).

  The “current game pseudo RB” is a pseudo RB in which the pseudo RB is announced and the game is started in the winning unit game. The “current game pseudo BB” is the pseudo BB in the winning unit game and the start of the game. Is a pseudo BB in which is performed. The “next game pseudo RB” is a pseudo RB in which the pseudo RB is announced and the game is started in the next unit game of the winning unit game, and the “next game pseudo BB” is the next of the winning unit game. This is a pseudo BB in which a pseudo BB is announced and a game is started in the unit game.

  The transition form 2 is a transition form of the effect game state when the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won in the pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) of the normal game.

  In the transition mode 2, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the normal gaming state, the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo bonus type “next game simulation RB” or “next game simulation BB” is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, the effect gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the notification waiting state as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the notification waiting state is maintained for a period until execution of various lottery processes when the lever is turned on in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the winning game of the pseudo bonus. That is, various game operations after the pseudo bonus lottery in the winning game are performed in a notification waiting state. In the transition mode 2, in the next game of the winning game, the pseudo BB stock lottery is performed, but the pseudo bonus lottery is not performed.

  Next, during the execution of various lottery processes when the lever is turned on in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game), the effect gaming state transitions from the notification waiting state to the uniform waiting state. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, a pseudo bonus start spinning effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (notification effect of a notification lamp) is performed, then reel rotation (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic reel stop effect is performed. .

  In the reel automatic stop effect, a specific symbol combination (designation referred to as “REG alignment” and “BIG alignment” described later) related to a pseudo bonus is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line set on three reels. When the effect ends, the effect game state transitions from the ready waiting state to the pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus game is started. When the pseudo bonus state is started, the reel is started to rotate by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels are completely stopped, the first game of the pseudo bonus is finished.

  In this embodiment, as in the transition mode 2, when the pseudo bonus is notified in the next game of the pseudo bonus winning game, the pseudo bonus winning may be notified in advance before the next game is started. For example, in the pseudo bonus winning game, after the third stop of the reels, an effect of turning on the notification lamp for a moment may be performed. By providing such a prior notice effect, the player can know the winning of the pseudo bonus before the notice effect of the next game.

(3) Transition form 3
The transition form 3 is a transition form of the effect gaming state when the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won in the pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) of the normal game.

  In the transition mode 3, first, when the player operates the start lever 16 in the normal game state, the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo bonus type “current game simulation RB” or “current game simulation BB” is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, the effect gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the uniform waiting state as shown in FIG. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, a pseudo bonus start spinning effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (notification effect of a notification lamp) is performed, then reel rotation (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic reel stop effect is performed. .

  In the reel automatic stop effect, a specific symbol combination (designation referred to as “REG alignment” and “BIG alignment” described later) related to a pseudo bonus is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line set on three reels. When the effect ends, the effect game state transitions from the ready waiting state to the pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus game is started. When the pseudo bonus state is started, the reel is started to rotate by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels are completely stopped, the first game of the pseudo bonus is finished.

(4) Transition form 4
The transition form 4 is a transition form of the effect game state in the unit game in the pseudo bonus.

  In the transition mode 4, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus game is started. In the pseudo bonus state, pseudo lottery lottery is performed for each unit game, but pseudo bonus lottery is not performed.

  Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) is consumed from the start of the previous game, the reels are started to rotate in a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels are completely stopped, the unit game of the pseudo bonus is finished.

  In the transition mode 4 as described above, the effect gaming state does not transition during the period of one game, and the pseudo bonus state is maintained.

(5) Transition form 5
The transition form 5 is a transition form of the effect gaming state of the pseudo bonus end (final) game when the pseudo bonus ends and the effect gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state without winning the pseudo BB stock lottery. .

  In the transition mode 5, first, in the end game in the pseudo bonus state, when the player operates the start lever 16, the pseudo bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, the reel is started to rotate in a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed.

  Next, when the reels are completely stopped in the end game, the game of the pseudo bonus end game is ended. In the transition mode 5, at the end of the pseudo bonus, the effect gaming state transitions from the pseudo bonus state to the normal gaming state. In addition, the transition form after a game is complete | finished with the transition form 5 will be either of the transition forms 1-3. And when a production | presentation game state transfers to the transition form 3 from the transition form 5, a pseudo | simulation bonus will be performed continuously.

(6) Transition form 6
The transition form 6 is a transition form of the effect gaming state of the pseudo bonus end (final) game in the case where the pseudo BB is started in 1G series after the pseudo bonus game ends.

  In the transition mode 6, first, in the end game in the pseudo bonus state, when the player operates the start lever 16, the pseudo bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, the reel is started to rotate in a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed.

  Next, when the reels are completely stopped in the end game, the game of the pseudo bonus end game ends. However, in the transition mode 6, after the end of the current set of pseudo bonus, the stock 1G series pseudo bonus starts (releases). )

  Therefore, when the reels are completely stopped in the end game of the current set of pseudo bonus, the effect gaming state transitions from the pseudo bonus state to the notification waiting state. The transition form after the end of the pseudo bonus game in transition form 6 is the transition form of the pseudo bonus notification game in transition form 2. Therefore, in the transition mode 6, when the end game of the pseudo bonus ends and the effect gaming state transitions to the notification waiting state, the notification waiting state is executed by executing various lottery processes when the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) is turned on. Maintained until time.

<Various production lottery states>
In the present embodiment, various lotteries are performed in a game in a normal game state or a game in a pseudo bonus state. For example, a pseudo bonus lottery is performed in a game in a normal gaming state, and a pseudo BB stock lottery is performed in a pseudo bonus game.

  In the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of effect lottery states (modes) having different winning probability of the pseudo bonus lottery and different winning probability of the stock lottery of the pseudo BB. Specifically, eight types of effect lottery states (modes) of mode 0 to mode 7 are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, transition lottery of the effect lottery state (mode) is performed at the time of the start of the pseudo bonus and the unit game during the pseudo bonus period, and when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed.

<Ceiling function>
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function (so-called ceiling function) that determines the provision of a pseudo bonus when the number of digested games in a normal game reaches the number of games for which a pseudo bonus is released (so-called ceiling game number).

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of release games (“31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”) are provided, and the number of release games of the pseudo bonus selected from among them is the effect lottery state ( Depending on the mode). Therefore, as will be described later, in this embodiment, each time a mode transition lottery is performed, a lottery process for the number of games to be released from the pseudo bonus (a next pseudo bonus to be described later) is performed based on the changed effect lottery state (mode). Transition game number lottery processing) is performed.

<Pseudo Bonus Start Cylinder Production>
[Overview of pseudo bonus start spinning production]
Next, the contents of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect performed at the start of the pseudo bonus will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an operation flow of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect. Note that the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is performed in a state where a lock that invalidates or delays the game operation by the player has occurred.

  First, when a pseudo bonus is won by a pseudo bonus lottery when the lever is turned on, a predetermined notification wait time of the pseudo bonus is set. The notice wait time is a wait period provided to make the start timing of the automatic reel stop effect described later constant regardless of the symbol stop position of the reel at the end of the previous game. The notification wait time can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is set to 2000 msec regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus won.

  Next, after digesting the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game, a notice effect is performed by turning on the notice lamp. In this notification effect, for example, a specific pattern image is lit by a plurality of LEDs (notification lamps: not shown) arranged in a matrix on the display device 11. The operation of the notification effect is controlled by the sub control circuit 42 based on notification lamp lighting instruction information (information included in the start command) transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The notification effect is not limited to a simple effect in which a notification lamp (LED) is turned on. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be used as the display device 11 and a notification effect using a moving image (video) may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to produce an effect with a content that completes the notification with a moving image (video) during the period from the start of the notification effect (after digesting the wait time from the start of the previous game) to the start of reel rotation. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the example performed after digesting the waiting time (4.1 sec) from the time of a previous game start, the lighting effect of a notification lamp is demonstrated, This invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification lamp can be turned on at an arbitrary timing as long as it is after digestion of the wait time (4.1 sec) and within the period of the notification wait time. In addition, for example, if the timing is after digestion of the wait time (4.1 sec) and before the “REG uniform” or “BIG uniform” symbol combination described below is automatically stopped, the notification lamp is set at an arbitrary timing. Can be turned on.

  Next, the three reels are driven to rotate in a predetermined pattern (forward rotation, reverse rotation, etc.). Thereafter, a stop preparation operation 1 and a stop preparation operation 2 are performed for stopping a specific symbol combination on a predetermined virtual line by an automatic reel stop effect.

  In the stop preparation operation 1, during the rotation of the reel, the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “red” of the right reel 3R constituting a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB. 7 ”relative position relationship, or the symbol“ red 7 ”of the left reel 3L, the symbol“ red 7 ”of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol“ BAR ”of the right reel 3R constituting a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo RB. The rotational speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that the relative positional relationship becomes a predetermined positional relationship. In addition, the adjustment method of the relative positional relationship of the symbols of each reel in the stop preparation operation 1 is not limited to this example. For example, a method of shifting the rotation start timing of each reel may be adopted.

  For example, when the pseudo-BB is started, when the reels are automatically stopped in a normal stop pattern described later (see FIGS. 10A and 10B described later), the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L and the symbol “red” of the middle reel 3C are used. The rotational speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that the “7” and the symbol “red 7” of the right reel 3R are aligned in a horizontal row during the rotation of the reel. In addition, when the reels are automatically stopped in the normal stop pattern described later at the start of the pseudo RB, the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “BAR” of the right reel 3R. "Is finely adjusted such that the rotational speed of each reel is aligned in a horizontal row during the rotation of the reel.

  Next, in the stop preparation operation 2, it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus notification wait time (2000 msec) set when the lever is turned on has elapsed. If it is determined by this determination process that the notification wait time has not elapsed, the process waits until the notification wait time is consumed.

  Then, after the pseudo-bonus notification wait time elapses, the reel automatic rotation effect is started after the reel has made one full turn. In the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” and “BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped in a predetermined automatic stop pattern on a predetermined virtual line. Is done.

  In the automatic reel stop effect, a plurality of types of automatic stop patterns (stop effect patterns) are prepared, and a predetermined automatic stop pattern is determined from the multiple types of automatic stop patterns by lottery. In addition, depending on the type of automatic stop pattern, the type of a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” described later) associated with a pseudo bonus to be automatically stopped, and a specific symbol combination The type of virtual line to be stopped is also automatically determined. The contents of each automatic stop pattern will be described in detail later.

  Next, when the reel automatic stop effect ends, a reel lock called “pseudo bonus winning lock” occurs. During the operation period of the pseudo bonus winning lock, the sub-control circuit 42 performs various effects (for example, occurrence of fanfare) for notifying the start of the pseudo bonus. The lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock can be changed as appropriate according to the type of the pseudo bonus to be started. For example, the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock at the start of the pseudo BB is 4000 msec and the pseudo RB starts. The lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock can be set to 700 msec.

  When the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock elapses, normal reel rotation (normal acceleration processing) is executed, and the first game of the pseudo bonus is started.

  In the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus start spinning effect (reel action) is performed as described above. When the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won, the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect is executed in the winning game, and the pseudo bonus is obtained from the winning game. Be started. Further, when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won, the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect is executed in the next game of the win game, and is simulated from the next game. Bonus starts.

  When the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect is provided, in the pseudo bonus start game, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (referred to as “REG alignment” and “BIG alignment”, which will be described later) automatically during the lock period. The symbol combination) stops on a predetermined virtual line, and a pseudo bonus game is started. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus game (special game) can be started regardless of the skill of the player.

  Normally, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” and “BIG alignment” described later) is obtained through a reel rotation start operation after detecting the start operation of the start bonus in the pseudo bonus state. The time until stopping on the predetermined virtual line is not constant because it depends on the position of the symbol that is stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus. In other words, the period during which the notification effect by the notification lamp can be executed (notification effect time) depends on the position of the symbol that has been stopped before the pseudo bonus start game. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping the specific symbol combination on the predetermined virtual line is set to the predetermined notification wait time (2000 msec). It is possible to execute the notification effect by the notification lamp within the period of the notification wait time. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to guarantee the notification effect time that does not depend on the position of the symbols that are stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus.

  Further, in the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect, the pseudo bonus winning is notified when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed, and then the reel rotation operation is started. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the reel rotation operation pattern (reverse rotation, etc.) at the start of the pseudo bonus is increased, after the reel starts rotating, a specific symbol combination (hereinafter described as “ It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the “REG matching” and “BIG matching” symbol combinations) are automatically stopped by the effect (stopped while locked). Similarly to the normal game (when the pseudo bonus start spinning effect (lock) does not occur), the reel rotation operation starts after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game. It can be prevented that the presence / absence of the bonus start spinning effect (lock) is immediately determined. From these things, in this embodiment, the notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning can be made more effective.

[Various automatic stop patterns of reels]
In the present embodiment, as the automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern) of the reel in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, “normal stop pattern”, “all simultaneous simultaneous stop pattern”, “high speed stop pattern”, “long stop pattern” , Six types of automatic stop patterns called “re-stop pattern” and “swing stop pattern” are provided. Hereinafter, an outline of the operation of each automatic stop pattern will be described with reference to the drawings (refer to FIG. 17 described later for the symbol arrangement in each figure).

(1) Normal stop pattern In the normal stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparatory operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap. The right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the third lap, or the right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the first lap, the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped in the second lap, and the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the third lap. This is a stop pattern. This normal stop pattern may be executed in both the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB and the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo RB.

  In the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo BB, a specific symbol combination “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7” (hereinafter referred to as “BIG aligned”) related to the pseudo BB is set on three reels. The display is stopped on a predetermined virtual line (one of the center line, the top line, the bottom line, the cross-down line, and the cross-up line). Further, in the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo RB, a specific symbol combination “red 7”-“red 7”-“BAR” (hereinafter referred to as “REG uniform”) related to the pseudo RB is a predetermined virtual line (center). Any one of the line, top line, bottom line, cross down line, and cross up line).

  FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B show a stop operation example of the normal stop pattern. FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop pattern stop operation performed in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo RB, and the stop of the normal stop pattern for automatically stopping “REG alignment” on the center line. It is a figure which shows operation | movement. On the other hand, FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a stop operation of a normal stop pattern performed in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB, and the stop of the normal stop pattern that automatically stops “BIG alignment” on the center line. It is a figure which shows operation | movement.

  In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10A, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first round after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Subsequently, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second round. At this time, the middle reel 3C is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the third round. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “BAR” stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R.

  In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10B, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first round after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Subsequently, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second round. At this time, the middle reel 3C is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the third round. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R.

(2) All-turn cylinder simultaneous stop pattern Although not shown, the all-turn cylinder simultaneous stop pattern automatically stops all three reels simultaneously at the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). This is a stop pattern. If it is determined that the all-cylinder simultaneous stop pattern is to be executed, after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed, and after a predetermined all-cylinder simultaneous stop weight time is digested, Automatic stop operation is started.

  The all-rotation simultaneous stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the all-turn cylinder simultaneous stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

(3) High-speed stop pattern In the high-speed stop pattern, the three reels are arranged in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, the left reel 3L, the middle reel) after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). This is a stop pattern that automatically stops in the order of 3C and right reel 3R). Note that the high-speed stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB.

  FIG. 11 shows a stop operation example of the high-speed stop pattern. In the high-speed pattern shown in FIG. 11, first, in the stage of the stop preparation operations 1 and 2, the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L, and the symbol “red 7” stops in the upper region of the middle reel 3C. Then, a state in which the right reel 3R is rotating is generated.

  Next, after the pseudo-bonus notification wait time has elapsed, in the rotating right reel 3R, when the symbol “red 7” reaches a position one level higher in the upper area of the right reel 3R (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “ An automatic stop effect of three reels is started, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are also started to rotate again. That is, at the timing when “BIG alignment” is aligned on a line (preparation line) that connects the upper stage area of the middle area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R, An automatic stop effect for three reels is started. Then, in the first turn after the start of the automatic stop effect of the three reels, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order. At this time, the three reels are controlled to stop so that “BIG alignment” is stopped on the center line.

  More specifically, in this high-speed stop pattern, after the misalignment state is generated, the left reel 3L is rotated and stopped by 20 frames in the forward direction, and the middle reel 3C is rotated and moved by 21 frames in the forward direction. The right reel 3R is rotated 22 frames in the forward direction and stopped. That is, in the high-speed stop pattern, after the misalignment state is generated, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the center line before the reel makes two turns. In this stop pattern, the symbol combination can be changed to “BIG aligned” (red 7 aligned) in the shortest time from the misaligned state (prepared state).

  By providing the above-described automatic stop effect of the reel with the high-speed stop pattern as one of the reel effects, a variety of interesting reel actions can be provided to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player's interest in reel action (reel production) can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are stopped and the right reel 3R is rotating when generating the misalignment state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R may be stopped and the left reel 3L may be rotated to generate a shift state, or the right reel 3R and the left reel 3L may be stopped and the middle reel 3C may be rotating. As a result, a shift state may be generated.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the automatic stop effect of the high-speed stop pattern can be generated only at the start of the pseudo BB has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the automatic stop of the high-speed stop pattern is also performed at the start of the pseudo RB. You may make it the structure which can produce | generate an effect.

  In this case, the flow from the stop preparation operations 1 and 2 to the automatic reel stop operation is as follows. First, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the upper region of the middle reel 3C, and the state where the right reel 3R is rotating is generated. Next, after the pseudo-bonus notification wait time has elapsed, the symbol “BAR” has reached the position one level higher in the upper area of the right reel 3R in the rotating right reel 3R (the state of misalignment is generated). The automatic reeling effect of the three reels is started at the timing, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are also started to rotate again. Thereafter, in the same manner as the stop operation described with reference to FIG. 11, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order on the first turn after the start of the automatic stop effect of the three reels. “REG assortment” is stopped.

(4) Long stop pattern The long stop pattern automatically stops the left reel 3L on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses), and automatically stops the middle reel 3C on the second lap. After that, the stop pattern automatically stops the right reel 3R not in the third round but in the fourth round. It should be noted that the long stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the long stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 12 shows a stop operation example of the long stop pattern. In the long stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first round after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Subsequently, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second round. At this time, the middle reel 3C is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. In the third lap, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the fourth lap without stopping the right reel 3R. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R.

(5) Re-stop pattern In the re-stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the first lap after the stop preparatory operation 2 is finished (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is turned in the second lap. Automatically stops and automatically stops the right reel 3R in the third lap. At this time, the three reels are controlled to stop so that “REG alignment” is stopped on the center line. Next, the left reel 3L or the right reel 3R is moved again to stop “BIG alignment” on a predetermined virtual line. That is, in the restart pattern, after the pseudo bonus to be started is made to appear as a pseudo RB, the fact that the pseudo bonus to be started is a pseudo BB is notified.

  The re-stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the restart pattern, when the left reel 3L is moved again at the end, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the cross-down line, and when the right reel 3R is moved again at the end, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 13 shows a stop operation example of the restart pattern. In the restart pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first round after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Subsequently, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second round. At this time, the middle reel 3C is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Next, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the third round. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “BAR” stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R. Therefore, at this point in time, “REG alignment” is stopped on the center line.

  After that, when the right reel 3R is rotated by one frame in the reverse direction (the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13) and stopped, as shown in A after the stop in FIG. Stopped on. Further, after “REG alignment” is temporarily stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L is rotated by one frame in the reverse direction (the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13) and stopped. As shown in B after the stop, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the cross-down line.

  In the stop operation example of the restart pattern shown in FIG. 13, the example in which the right reel 3R or the left reel 3L is finally rotated and rotated by one frame in the reverse direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, after “REG alignment” is temporarily stopped on the center line, the right reel 3R is rotated by 19 frames in the forward direction (the direction from top to bottom in FIG. 13), and “BIG alignment” is set to the center line. You may stop on top. Further, for example, after “REG alignment” is temporarily stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L may be rotated 19 frames in the forward direction to stop “BIG alignment” on the cross-down line.

(6) Shake stop pattern In the shake stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap. Then, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the third lap. However, in the shaking stop pattern, the reels are alternately rotated in a minute range alternately in the forward and reverse directions around the stop position without completely stopping each reel. That is, in the shaking stop pattern, each reel is stopped in a state (vibrating state) that swings along the rotation direction of the reel with the stop position as the center.

  Note that the shaking stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the shaking stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 14 shows a stop operation example of the shaking stop pattern. In the shaking stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first round after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time elapses). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the left reel 3L has a small amount along the rotation direction of the reel centering on the stop position. It is controlled so as to sway in the range (rotating and moving alternately in the forward and reverse directions).

  Subsequently, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second round. At this time, the middle reel 3C is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle reel 3C has a small amount along the rotation direction of the reel with the stop position as the center. Controlled to sway in range.

  Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the third round. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R, and the right reel 3R has a minute amount along the rotation direction of the reel with the stop position as the center. Controlled to sway in range.

[Reel stop positions]
In the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of stop positions (stop lines) of “BIG aligned” or “REG aligned” that are finally stopped and displayed by the automatic stop effect of the reels. FIG. 15 shows various stop positions (stop lines) of “BIG aligned” and “REG aligned”.

  In this embodiment, the stop position (stop line) of “REG alignment” is on the cross-down line (stop position 1 in FIG. 15 (cross-down REG alignment)), on the center line (stop position 2 in FIG. 15 ( Middle REG alignment)), cross-up line (stop position 3 in FIG. 15 (cross-up REG alignment)), top line (stop position 4 in FIG. 15 (upper REG alignment)), and bottom line ( There are five types of stop positions, stop positions 5 (lower REG alignment) in FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, as the stop position (stop line) of “BIG alignment”, on the cross-down line (stop position 6 (alignment of cross-down BIG) in FIG. 15) and on the center line (stop position in FIG. 15). 7 (middle stage BIG alignment)), on the cross-up line (stop position 8 in FIG. 15 (cross-up BIG alignment)), on the top line (stop position 9 in FIG. 15 (upper BIG alignment)), and bottom line There are five types of stop positions at the top (stop position 10 in FIG. 15 (lower BIG aligned)).

  Note that the type of stop position (stop line) of “BIG aligned” or “REG aligned” is determined in accordance with the reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern), so the reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern). ) Is determined, the type of stop position (stop line) of “BIG aligned” or “REG aligned” is also uniquely determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect at the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) is the mode for the extended resort where the effect lottery state (mode 6 or mode 7) is easy for the pseudo BB to win, Is an effect that suggests that the mode can be expected (for example, the mode itself has a high loop rate). In the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect at the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) may be selected only when the effect lottery state is mode 6 or mode 7 (see FIG. 60 described later).

<Various reel locks executed during the pseudo bonus game period>
[Various reel locks at the start of pseudo bonus]
The pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock at the start (or win) of the pseudo bonus. That is, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock as a pseudo bonus start or winning notification effect.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of reel locks are provided as reel locks to be generated at this time. Specifically, a reel lock with a short lock time called “short lock” and a reel lock with a long lock time called “freeze” are provided. The freeze is provided with two types of reel locks, “Freeze A” and “Freeze B”.

  In this embodiment, the lock time of the short lock (specific lock) is 1000 msec, the lock time of freeze A is 30000 msec, and the lock time of freeze B is 2000 msec. When Freeze B is executed, the game is set to be possible after 30000 msec from the start of Freeze B lock.

  Whether or not these reel locks are generated and the type of reel locks to be generated are determined by reel lock lottery performed in a pseudo bonus winning game. At this time, the types of reel locks to be won may be short locks, freeze A and freeze B reel locks, respectively, or both short lock and freeze A, or short lock and freeze B. Both may win.

  If execution of a predetermined reel lock is determined by reel lock lottery, the reel after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed in the winning game or start game of the pseudo bonus A lock is executed. In other words, the reel lock is executed before the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect (before the pseudo bonus notification).

  The various reel locks described above are configured to occur mainly when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won (see FIG. 40 described later). To FIG. 47). When a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won and a short lock is won as a reel lock, in the game where the pseudo bonus is won, from the start of the previous game After the wait time is digested, a short lock occurs. In this case, an effect is provided in which the game start (reel rotation start) is slightly delayed.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won and freeze A or freeze B is won as a reel lock, the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus is won ( In the pseudo bonus notification game), after the wait time from the start of the previous game (winning game) is consumed, Freeze A or Freeze B occurs, and then the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won and a short lock and a freeze A or freeze B are won as a reel lock, a pseudo bonus is won. In the game, after the wait time from the start of the previous game was consumed, a short lock occurred and the wait time from the start of the previous game (win game) was consumed in the next game after the pseudo bonus was won. Thereafter, Freeze A or Freeze B occurs, and then the above-described pseudo bonus start spinning effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not a short lock has occurred is managed by a flag called “short lock flag”, and whether or not freeze A has occurred is managed by a flag called “freeze A flag”. Presence / absence is managed by a flag called “freeze B flag”. In the following, the flags for managing the presence / absence of occurrence of these reel locks are collectively referred to as “production reservation flags”. These effect reservation flags are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Long weight production function]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the starting game of the pseudo bonus, the 1G series pseudo BB stock lottery is performed. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when this stock lottery is won, a pseudo bonus of a predetermined number of games executed after the current game (70 games in the case of pseudo BB, 20 games in the case of pseudo RB). In a specific unit game within the period, a function of performing a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as “long weight effect”) that slightly extends the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is provided.

  Specifically, in the long weight production, when the pseudo-bonus starting game of the 1G series is won in the stock lottery of the 1G series, the pre-game is played after the lever is turned on in the pseudo-bonus unit game of the specific number of games after the second game. After the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start is digested, a short lock of a predetermined lock time (1000 msec in this embodiment) is generated. The presence / absence of the long weight effect and the game to be generated are determined by lottery.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, it is internally determined whether or not to perform the 1G series of pseudo BBs after the game period of the current set of pseudo bonus. Further, in the present embodiment, when a 1G run of pseudo BB is won in the start game of the pseudo bonus, a long weight effect is performed in which a 1G run of pseudo BB is expected during the game period of the current set of pseudo bonus. Is called. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest of the player in the AT operation can be maintained, and the interest of the player in the game during the pseudo bonus game period can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the game period of the pseudo bonus, 1G continuous pseudo BB stock lottery is performed for each unit game. The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment also has a function capable of generating a long weight effect (occurrence of a short lock) in the corresponding game when winning the stock lottery. It should be noted that whether or not a long weight effect is generated when the stock lottery in the pseudo bonus is won is determined by lottery.

  In addition, when the occurrence timing of the long weight effect triggered by the stock lottery during the pseudo bonus overlaps with the occurrence timing of the long weight effect set by the stock lottery winning in the pseudo bonus start game described above The long weight effect (short lock) is executed once without generating the long weight effect (short lock) twice.

  In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of a long weight effect is managed by a short lock flag that manages the presence / absence of a short lock determined by the reel lock lottery described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect reservation flag for managing the presence / absence of occurrence of a long weight effect is provided separately from the effect reservation flag for managing the presence / absence of occurrence of a short lock determined by reel lock lottery. May be.

[Generation mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game during a pseudo bonus, a short lock (long weight effect) may occur as a reel effect at the start of the game. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the start lever 16 is operated and the rotation of the reel is started, a predetermined sound (hereinafter referred to as “rotation start sound”) is generated at the start of the reel rotation by the speakers 20L and 20R. It has an effect (specific effect) function to be generated from. The operation of generating the reel rotation start sound is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the generation mode of the rotation start sound when the short lock is generated is different from that when the short lock is not generated (for example, when starting a normal game or starting a reel effect where no short lock occurs). Make it.

  FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams showing the generation mode (generation timing) of the rotation start sound of the reel at the start of the game. FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating a generation mode (generation timing) of a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is not generated, and FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating a generation mode of a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is generated. .

  First, how the reel rotation start sound is generated when no short lock occurs will be described. When the short lock is not generated, the main control circuit 41 transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub control circuit 42 at a specific timing after the start lever 16 is operated, and executes a reel rotation start operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16A, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound when receiving the reel rotation start command. Therefore, when short lock is not generated, a rotation start sound is generated at the start of the reel rotation operation.

  Next, how the reel rotation start sound is generated when a short lock occurs will be described. When a short lock occurs (when a long weight effect occurs), first, the main control circuit 41 starts a short lock (long weight effect) at a specific timing after the start lever 16 is operated, and the sub control circuit 42. The below-described effect instruction command (see FIG. 80 described later) is transmitted. When the occurrence period of the short lock elapses, the main control circuit 41 executes a reel rotation start operation.

  The production instruction command is a command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 at every opportunity of various production operations during the reel production, and information corresponding to the opportunity is set and transmitted to the production instruction command. Therefore, for example, at the start of the short lock (long weight effect), an effect instruction command in which information indicating the start of the reel effect (long weight effect) is set is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In addition, the transmission timing of the effect instruction command transmitted at the start of short lock (long weight effect) (or the reception timing on the sub side) is substantially the same as that of the reel rotation start command when no short lock occurs. That is, the generation timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock (long weight effect) is generated is substantially the same as the generation timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock is not generated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound triggered by the reception of the effect instruction command at the start of the short lock (long weight effect).

  That is, in this embodiment, when a short lock occurs, a rotation start sound is generated at the start of the short lock, and then the reel rotation operation is started after the short lock occurrence period has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a short lock occurs, the reel rotation start operation is delayed by the short lock period from the generation of the rotation start sound.

  By providing such a rotation start sound effect function, when a short lock occurs, the rotation start sound generation operation at the start of the effect is the same as that at normal time, but the reel rotation start operation generates the rotation start sound. Will be late. Therefore, a contradiction can be generated between the effect operation by the rotation start sound and the actual operation of the reel, so that an effective effect can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the generation effect of the rotation start sound has been described as an example of the effect of generating a deviation from the rotation start operation of the reel when a short lock occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the effect of performing a specific effect operation is triggered by the start of rotation of the reel, the effect technology at the time of occurrence of the short lock described above can be applied to any effect. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed by the display device 11, the lamp group 21, a movable accessory, etc., triggered by the start of the rotation of the reel, the short lock is performed in the same manner as the operation for generating the rotation start sound. At the time of occurrence, control may be performed such that these effects and the reel rotation start operation are shifted from each other.

[Reel lock function at the end of pseudo bonus]
The pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo bonus END lock”) after the third stop of the reel in a set of pseudo bonus end games. The pseudo bonus END lock is always generated at the end of the pseudo bonus, and not only when the normal game is started after the end of the one set of pseudo bonus, but also in the first game after the end of the one set of pseudo bonus. This is also done when a pseudo bonus is started.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the third post-stop effect process performed after the display combination is determined (after the display command generation / storage process is completed) and before the medal payout process and the bonus operation check process, Bonus END lock is performed (see FIGS. 81 and 105 described later). That is, in this embodiment, when the display combination is a small combination, a pseudo bonus END lock is performed before the medal payout process, and when the display combination is a replay combination, before the automatic medal insertion process. A pseudo bonus END lock is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display combination is a small combination, a pseudo bonus END lock is performed after the medal payout process, and when the display combination is a replay combination, the medal is automatically inserted. A pseudo bonus END lock may be performed after the processing.

  The lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock changes according to the type of the pseudo bonus to be ended. In this embodiment, the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo BB is 5200 msec, and the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo RB is 2500 msec.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 17) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window of each reel is defined as “0”. In each reel, the symbol counter value “0” corresponds to the value of the symbol counter in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “19” in FIG. 17 toward symbol position “0”). “0” to “19” are assigned to the symbols as symbol positions.

  That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, it is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the display window frame of each reel. It is possible to specify the type of symbol that is present. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in each of the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L within the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “Bell”, the symbol “Replay 2” at the symbol position “7”, and the symbol “BAR” at the symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 6) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a symbol combination (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of bonus (bonus, small role, replay), the content (storage area, data) of the corresponding display symbol code and the number of payouts. Stipulates the correspondence with

  In this embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (cross down line) matches the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, a prize is won. It is determined. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given a privilege such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation. In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the effective line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. In other words, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define the symbol combination “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying symbol combinations displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination code column is data for designating a later-described symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73 described later) in which the corresponding symbol combination data is stored. In the present embodiment, 33 symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In a symbol combination to which a value of 1 or more is assigned as the “payout number” data, medals of the same number as that number are paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name “C_7 sheets A” (CD bell) is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination “bell” related to “C_7 sheets A”). "-" Bell "-" bell "is stopped and displayed on the active line), 7 medals are paid out.

  Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “C_Lip A1_1” (middle stage replay) is determined (the symbol combination “Bell” − “Replay 1” − “Bell” related to “C_Lip A1_1”) Is displayed on the active line), the replay is activated. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination relating to the combination name “C_BB” (the symbol combination “Replay 3” — “Watermelon 1” — “Red 7” relating to “C_BB” is stopped and displayed on the active line. ) Is determined, BB (Big Bonus) is activated.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table includes a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70 described later) provided in the main RAM 53, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning number counter when the bonus game is operated. Specify the data to be stored.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of game state (the RT game state and the bonus game state) in operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, each game state flag indicating the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the BB gaming state is provided (see FIG. 70 described later).

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operation of the BB that is started when the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination relating to the name “C_BB” is stopped is terminated when medals exceeding the prescribed number “90” are paid out.

  That is, at the start of the bonus operation, the numerical value defined by the bonus operation time table is stored in the bonus end number counter, and thereafter, every time a medal is paid out through the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is changed. Subtracted. Then, the operation of the bonus is ended on condition that the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to less than “0”.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of the RB, that is, the so-called possible number of games. The winable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed in one RB game, so-called winable number of times.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately for each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (BB flag state), and the BB gaming state.

  Each internal lottery table includes a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small pointer / replay data pointer) acquired when each winning number is determined. And a bonus data pointer). In the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, for convenience of explanation, the name of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number and the effect lottery flag name are also described.

  In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles set in advance. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process according to the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random value) extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) is determined according to each winning number. Subtract sequentially. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of subtraction becomes negative (a “digit” occurs) at a predetermined winning number, the winning number (internal winning combination) is won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process according to the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data pointer is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs various lottery processes related to the pseudo bonus (AT). Various lottery tables used for the lottery process (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery table, a reel lock lottery table, which will be described later, and the modes) In the lottery table, etc., lottery values are defined for each effect lottery flag described in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. Therefore, when lottery processing is performed with reference to these lottery tables, lottery processing is performed based on the effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination. Hereinafter, the effect lottery flag with the name “determined role” and the effect lottery flag with the name “determined cherry” are collectively referred to as “determined”.

  Various effect lottery flags are stored in the main RAM 53. When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery, only the effect lottery flag corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is set to the on state (data “1” is stored), and other effects The lottery flag for use is set to an off state (data “0” is stored). For example, when the name “F_123B1” is won internally, only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” is turned on.

(1) RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) internal lottery table FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of an RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) internal lottery table. The RT0 gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when an internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state).

  The RT0 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “24” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be acquired.

  For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process referring to setting 1 of the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “2” (the internal winning combination related to the name “F_BB”) is won is 4000/65536. In this case, “0” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  Further, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process referring to setting 1 of the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “3” (the internal winning combination related to the name “F_Replay”) is won is 8978/65536. It becomes. In this case, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  In the following, the internal winning combination corresponding to the lottery flags for production of the names “cherry”, “watermelon”, “determined combination”, “determined combination”, and “church” is called “rare combination”. "

(2) RT1 gaming state (BB flag state) internal lottery table FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration of an RT1 gaming state (BB flag state) internal lottery table. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT1 gaming state (BB flag gaming state).

  The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “24” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the obtainable data pointers.

  For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process referring to setting 1 of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “2” (the internal winning combination related to the name “F_BB”) is won is 0. Since the RT1 gaming state is a state between BB flags, the BB combination is not won in the RT1 gaming state.

  Also, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to setting 1 of the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number “3” (the internal winning combination relating to the name “F_Replay”) is 12978/65536 It becomes. That is, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT1 gaming state (BB flag gaming state) is higher than that in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state). In this case, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(3) BB gaming state internal lottery table FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a configuration of the BB gaming state internal lottery table. The internal lottery table for the BB gaming state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the BB gaming state.

  The internal lottery table for the BB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “3” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be acquired.

  In the BB gaming state, as shown in FIG. 27, any of the internal winning combinations of the name “Lose”, the names “F_RB combination 1” and “F_RB combination 2” is won. The internal winning combination (small role / replay data “23”) relating to the name “F_RB combination 1” corresponds to all small combinations, and the internal winning combination relating to the name “F_RB combination 2” (for small combination / replay) The data “24”) corresponds to the combination names “C_1 sheet 40”, “C_1 sheet 1” to “C_1 sheet 47_2”, and “C_control 1_1” to “C_control 3”. That is, in the BB gaming state, the replay combination is not won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination determination table defines a correspondence between a data pointer associated with each internal winning combination and a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an effective line (cross-down line). That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer (internal winning combination) are determined, the types of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, that is, the types of display combinations that can be won are uniquely determined. It is determined.

  Various data described in the symbol combination (display combination) column in each symbol combination determination table are symbol combinations that allow display along an effective line set across the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data for identification. The “data” in the symbol combination (display combination) column is represented by 1-byte data, like the “data” in the display combination column in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit. In addition, a circle in the data pointer column in the symbol combination determination table indicates a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the active line in the acquired data pointer (internal winning symbol), that is, a display symbol that can be won. Indicates.

  In each symbol combination determination table shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 36, a symbol combination (display combination) related to the operation of the bonus is defined for the bonus data pointer “1”, and a small combination / replay data pointer “1”. The symbol combination (display combination) related to the small combination and the replay combination is defined for each of “24”. That is, the symbol combination determination table includes the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the display combination related to the bonus operation, and the display combination related to the small combination / replay data pointer and the medal payout or the display combination related to the replay operation. Stipulates the correspondence with

  For example, when “1” (the internal winning combination of the name “F_BB”) is acquired as the bonus data pointer, only the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_BB” is stopped as shown in FIGS. It can be displayed. Further, for example, when “1” (internal winning combination of the name “F_Replay”) is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the combination name “C_Lip A1_1”. ”To“ C_Lip E6_3 ”can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when “14” (the internal winning combination of the name “F_Common B1”) is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the combination name “C_7” The symbol combinations related to “A” to “C_7 sheets E2_2”, “C_control 2”, and “C_control 3” can be stopped and displayed.

  In the symbol combination determination table, the case where the “internal winning combination” is “lost” is not defined, but this is the case for all symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that combination display is not allowed.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the active line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23).

  For example, when the symbol “red 7” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 33 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (red 7) in the reel type “left”, “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to a displayable internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (described later, see FIG. 73).

[Pseudo bonus lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, various pseudo bonus lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery table is referred to when a pseudo bonus lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) is executed in a unit game in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode) in each setting (settings 1 to 6). The pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 38A to 38D are pseudo bonus lottery tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. Further, the pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are pseudo bonus lottery tables that are referred to when the effect lottery states are mode 4 to mode 7, respectively. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a separate pseudo bonus lottery table is provided for each setting. Here, for simplification of description, a pseudo bonus lottery table referred to when the setting is the setting 1 is used. Show only.

  The pseudo bonus lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between various lottery triggers of the pseudo bonus, winning / non-winning lottery values of the pseudo bonus set for each lottery trigger, and the pseudo bonus type at the time of winning. In the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning / non-winning of AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) and the AT start timing (the game or the next game) are simultaneously determined. Yes. In the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning / non-winning of AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB), the AT type (pseudo BB or pseudo RB), and the AT start timing ( The game or the next game) is determined at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the pseudo bonus is when the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, and “medium chee” is won internally. Or, it is when the number of games for digestion of normal games reaches the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (when reaching the ceiling). Further, there are four types of pseudo bonus winning types: “current game simulation RB”, “current game simulation BB”, “next game simulation RB”, and “next game simulation BB”.

  When the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flag of the name “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed” or “medium chee” is won internally, the pseudo bonus lottery processing is performed in the pseudo bonus lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referred to. In addition, when the number of games played in the normal game reaches the number of unlocked games for the pseudo bonus, the lottery value in the lottery opportunity “ceiling” column in the pseudo bonus lottery table is referred to in the pseudo bonus lottery process.

  For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “normal role”, a pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo bonus lottery, the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 189/65536, and the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 4/65536. Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is setting 1, the production lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “watermelon”, in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table, 1230 The pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of / 65536, and the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is won with a probability of 410/65536.

  Also, for example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “Cherry”, the pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo bonus lottery, the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 656/65536. Also, for example, the setting of the pachislot 1 is setting 1, the production lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “confirmed” (the production lottery flag is “confirmed role” or “confirmed cherry”) or “medium” In the case of “Che”, in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table, the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is always won. Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is setting 1, the production lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “ceiling”, in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table, The pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is setting 1 and the lottery opportunity is “confirmed” (confirmed role or confirmed cherry) or “medium chee” Regardless of the type of the effect lottery state (mode), the “next game pseudo BB” is always won. Further, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1 and the lottery opportunity is “ceiling”, the “current game pseudo RB” is always won in the modes 0 to 3, and in the modes 4 to 7, “ One of the “current game simulation RB” and the “current game simulation BB” always wins.

  In the present embodiment, information related to the start trigger (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus is managed using a flag referred to as an “actuation win opportunity flag”. This effect win opportunity flag is set for each type of pseudo bonus lottery trigger. Is provided. Specifically, as the stage winning opportunity flag, “normal role release flag”, “watermelon release flag”, “cherry release flag”, “confirmation release flag”, “middle stage cherry release flag” and “game number release flag” Various flags are provided.

  The normal combination release flag is an effect win opportunity flag that is set to ON when the lottery trigger is “normal combination” and a pseudo bonus is won, and the watermelon release flag is “watermelon” This is an effect winning opportunity flag that is set to ON when a pseudo bonus is won. The cherry release flag is an effect win opportunity flag that is set to ON when the lottery opportunity is “Cherry” and the pseudo bonus is won. This is an effect winning opportunity flag that is set to an on state when the pseudo-bonus is won. The middle stage cherry release flag is an effect winning opportunity flag that is set to ON when the lottery opportunity is “medium cho” and a pseudo bonus is won, and the game number release flag indicates that the lottery opportunity is “ This is an effect winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when the “ceiling” is won and the pseudo bonus is won.

  In this embodiment, when the pseudo bonus type “next game simulation RB” or “next game simulation BB” is won, a pseudo bonus is started in the next game of the corresponding game, and at this time, the above-mentioned long freeze is performed. (Freeze A or Freeze B) may occur. In the present embodiment, information regarding the start trigger (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus accompanied by the long freeze is managed by an effect winning trigger flag referred to as a “long freeze cancel flag”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo lottery stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game period, the pseudo BB is started in 1G series after the end of the pseudo bonus of the current set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, information related to the start trigger (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus due to the release of the stocked pseudo BB is also managed by the effect winning trigger flag called “pseudo BB stock release flag”. It should be noted that the various effect winning opportunity flags described above are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Reel lock lottery table]
Next, various reel lock lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reel lock lottery table is referred to in a reel lock lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) that is performed when winning a pseudo bonus lottery in a unit game in a normal gaming state.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a reel lock lottery table is provided for each combination of the type of winning pseudo bonus and the mode (effect lottery state). The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D and FIGS. 41A to 41D are tables that are referred to when the bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D are tables that are referred to when the production lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each table is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D and FIGS. 43A to 43D are tables that are referred to when the bonus type “current game pseudo BB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D are tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 43A to 43D are Each table is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D and FIGS. 45A to 45D are tables that are referred to when the bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D are tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each table is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

  Also, the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D and FIGS. 47A to 47D are tables that are referred to when the bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D are tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each table is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery table shows various lottery triggers for reel lock production performed at the start of the pseudo bonus, winning / non-winning lottery values of reel lock production set for each lottery trigger, and reel lock type at the time of winning Stipulates the correspondence with

  In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity for the reel lock effect is an internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, and “medium cho”. Or when the number of games for normal games reaches the number of unlocked games for the pseudo bonus (when reaching the ceiling). The winning types of the reel lock type are “short lock” (lock time 1000 msec), “freeze A” (lock time 30000 msec), “breeze B” (lock time 2000 msec), “short lock + freeze A” and “short”. There are 5 types of "lock + freeze B".

  In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flag of the name “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, or “medium check” is won internally, in the reel lock lottery process, the reel lock lottery The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referred to. In addition, when the number of games in the normal game reaches the number of games to be released from the pseudo bonus, the lottery value in the “lot ceiling” column in the reel lock lottery table is referred to in the reel lock lottery process.

  In the reel lock lottery process using the reel lock lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 47, the reel lock lottery is mainly performed when the bonus winning type is “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB”. The composition is such that the direction is won. For example, when the bonus winning type is “next game pseudo BB”, the production lottery state is mode 1, and the lottery opportunity is “medium cho”, as shown in FIG. 46B, 64/256 “Short lock” is won with probability, and “Freeze A”, “Freeze B”, “Short lock + Freeze A” and “Short lock + Freeze B” are won with a probability of 32/256.

  In this embodiment, the probability that the reel lock effect is won when “current game pseudo RB” is won is 0 as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, and the reel lock effect is won when “current game pseudo BB” is won. As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the probability of winning is also a very small value (not likely to win).

[Pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 51, various pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery tables will be described. Note that the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is referred to in a mode transition lottery process (see FIG. 89 described later) performed when winning a pseudo bonus lottery in a unit game in the normal gaming state.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is provided for each combination of the type of pseudo bonus won, the mode (effect lottery state), and the setting. The various pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 are tables that are referred to when the setting is “1”. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is provided separately for each setting, but here, in order to simplify the description, it is referred to when the setting is the setting 1. Only the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is shown.

  The pseudo bonus start time mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D and FIGS. 49A to 49D is a table referred to in the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo RB. Also, the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonus shown in FIGS. 49A to 49D. The start mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the production lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

  50A to 50D and FIGS. 51A to 51D are pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery tables that are referred to in the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo BB. 50A to 50D are tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonus shown in FIGS. 51A to 51D. The start mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the production lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

  The pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table includes various lottery triggers for the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo bonus, and each effect lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the transition destination set for each lottery trigger. Define the correspondence with lottery values.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger for the mode transition lottery is the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, and “medium chee”. It is when the number of games that have been played in the normal game reaches the number of games that have been released from the pseudo bonus (when the game reaches the ceiling) or when a freeze is won by reel lock lottery.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, or “medium check” is won internally, a pseudo bonus starts in the mode transition lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the hour mode transition lottery table is referred to. When the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for releasing the pseudo bonus, the lottery value in the lottery opportunity “ceiling” column in the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the mode transition lottery process. Further, when a freeze is won in the reel lock lottery, the lottery value in the lottery opportunity “FLZ” column in the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is referred to in the mode transition lottery process.

  In the mode transition lottery process using the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table, for example, when the pseudo BB starts, the setting is setting 1, the production lottery state is mode 4, and the lottery trigger is “cherry”. 51A, mode 0 is determined as the destination lottery state at the transition destination with a probability of 195/256, and mode 1 is determined as the destination lottery state at the destination of 26/256, as shown in FIG. 51A. , Mode 2 is determined as the production lottery state of the transition destination with a probability of 1/256. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is demoted.

  Further, in the mode transition lottery process using the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table, for example, at the start of the pseudo BB, the setting is setting 1, the production lottery state is mode 4, and the lottery trigger is “ In the case of “Cherry”, as shown in FIG. 51A, mode 5 is determined as the destination lottery state with the probability of 32/256, and mode 6 is set as the destination lottery state with the probability of 2/256. It is determined. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is promoted.

[Pseudo bonus medium mode transition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, various pseudo bonus medium mode transition lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus mode transition lottery table is referred to in a mode transition lottery process (see FIGS. 90 and 91 described later) performed when winning a pseudo BB stock lottery in a unit game during the pseudo bonus game period. Is done.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus medium mode transition lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode). 52A to 52D are tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonus medium mode transition shown in FIGS. 53A to 53D. The lottery table is a table that is referred to when the production lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a common pseudo bonus medium mode transition lottery table is used regardless of the type of pseudo bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo bonus is separately provided for each type of pseudo bonus. A medium mode transition lottery table may be provided.

  In the pseudo bonus medium mode lottery table, lottery triggers for the mode transition lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period and lottery states of the transition destinations set for each lottery trigger (modes 0 to 7) Specifies the correspondence with values. In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity for the pseudo bonus middle mode transition lottery includes the internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, and “medium chee”. It ’s time to win inside.

  In the pseudo-bonus mode transition lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the effect lottery state (mode) is not demoted by the mode transition lottery processing during the pseudo bonus game period. Is set.

  For example, when the current effect lottery state is modes 0 to 4, a lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery opportunity so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 5 or higher is determined. . In addition, when the current effect lottery state is mode 5, a lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery trigger so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 5 or higher is determined. When the effect lottery state is mode 6, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery opportunity so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 6 or higher is determined. In addition, when the current effect lottery state is mode 7, the lottery value is appropriately set so that mode 7 is maintained as the effect lottery state regardless of the type of lottery opportunity.

[Setting change mode transition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the setting change mode transition lottery table will be described. The mode change lottery table at the time of setting change is referred to in the effect lottery mode lottery process (see FIG. 83 described later) performed when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed (when an operation to the setting change switch (not shown) is detected). The

  The mode change lottery table at the time of setting change is the lottery value of each setting after change (any one of settings 1 to 6) and each production lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the transition destination defined for each setting. Stipulates the correspondence with

  In the setting change mode transition lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, one or more lottery values are defined for modes 0 to 3, and when the setting is changed, the effect lottery state is set to modes 0 to 0. 3 is determined. Specifically, in this embodiment, mode 0 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 128/256, and mode 1 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 39/256, regardless of the changed setting type. Mode 2 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 3/256, and mode 3 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 86/256.

[Next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table will be described. The next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table is referred to in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process (see FIGS. 83, 89, and 91 described later) for determining the number of games to be released from the pseudo bonus (the number of ceiling games of the normal game). Is done.

  The next pseudo lotion transfer game number lottery table includes each effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) and various next pseudo bonus transfer game numbers (number of pseudo bonus release games) defined for each effect lottery state. Defines the correspondence with the lottery value. The next pseudo bonus transfer game number specified in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table of the present embodiment is three types: “31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”.

  In the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery using the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table, when the effect lottery state is any of modes 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. When “1199” is determined as (number of pseudo bonus release games) and the effect lottery state is mode 3, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transition game number, and the effect lottery state is mode 4 In the case of any one of ˜7, “31” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In other words, in the present embodiment, the larger the mode value, the smaller the number of next-time simulated bonus transfer games (the number of ceiling games), and the higher the probability of winning the simulated bonus.

  In the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery using the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table, when “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number, the number of the next pseudo bonus transfer game will be described later. Next, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number (number of pseudo bonus release games) is determined with reference to the correspondence table of random numbers.

[Correspondence table of next pseudo bonus transfer game number and random value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a correspondence table between the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and the random value will be described.

  The correspondence table of the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and the random number value is “100 to 199” as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process (see FIGS. 83, 89, and 91 described later). Is determined, the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number (number of pseudo-bonus release games) is determined based on the acquired random number value. At this time, the random value used may be the random value used in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery, or a new random value (0 to 255) may be acquired.

  The correspondence table between the number of next pseudo bonus transfer games and the random number value defines the relationship between each random number value of 0 to 255 and the next pseudo bonus transfer game number (100 to 199) associated with each random value. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number 199-100 is associated with the random number value 0-99, respectively, and the next pseudo bonus transfer game number 199 is associated with the random value 100-199, respectively. Associate ~ 100. In the present embodiment, the next pseudo bonus transfer game numbers 199 to 144 are associated with the random numbers 200 to 255, respectively.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect lottery state is mode 3 (when “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number), 144 to 199 is set as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. The probability of being determined increases. It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the number of next pseudo bonus transfer games and the random number value is not limited to this example and can be arbitrarily set.

[Pseudo BB Stock lottery table at the start of pseudo bonus]
Next, various pseudo bonus start pseudo BB stock lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 57A and 57B. The pseudo bonus starting pseudo BB stock lottery table is referred to in the pseudo BB (1G series) stock lottery processing (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the pseudo bonus start game. FIG. 57A is a pseudo-bonus start pseudo BB stock lottery table referred to at the start of pseudo RB, and FIG. 57B is a pseudo-bonus start pseudo BB stock lottery table referred to at the time of pseudo BB start.

  The pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus shows the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB (1G series) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. ) For each type.

  At the start of the pseudo RB, as shown in FIG. 57A, the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock is won with a probability of 5/256 only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7. Further, at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. 57B, the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock is won with a probability of 32/256 only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7. That is, in this embodiment, when the effect lottery state is any one of modes 0 to 4, it is configured not to win the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus.

[Pseudo bonus medium pseudo BB stock lottery table]
Next, a pseudo bonus medium pseudo BB stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The pseudo bonus medium pseudo BB stock lottery table is referred to in the pseudo BB (1G series) stock lottery processing (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in a unit game (including a pseudo bonus start game) during the pseudo bonus game period. Is done.

  The pseudo bonus medium pseudo BB stock lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery results) of the pseudo BB (1G series) and lottery values set for each lottery result for each lottery opportunity. . In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the stock lottery process in the pseudo bonus is an internal winning combination corresponding to the effect lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “confirmed”, and “medium chee” It ’s time for winning.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period, when the lottery opportunity is “normal combination”, as shown in FIG. 58, the lottery is won for the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock lottery. do not do. Also, for example, in the stock lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period, if the lottery trigger is “Watermelon”, the pseudo lottery (1G ream) stock lottery is won with a probability of 5/256. Is “cherry”, the pseudo lottery (1G ream) stock lottery is won with a probability of 1/256. Further, for example, in the lottery processing during the pseudo bonus game period, if the lottery opportunity is “confirmed” or “medium chee”, the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is always won.

[Pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table]
Next, various pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table is a reel effect lottery process executed when determining a reel stop effect pattern (automatic stop pattern of a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus) in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect ( Reference is made to FIG. 92 described later).

  59 is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when pseudo RB starts and no freeze occurs when pseudo RB starts. FIG. 60 shows pseudo BB start. This is a pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when there is no freeze at the start of the pseudo BB. FIG. 61 is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo BB starts and the “Freeze A” reel lock effect occurs at the start of the pseudo BB. Is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when a “locked B” reel lock effect occurs at the start of the pseudo BB and when the pseudo BB starts.

  The pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table shows the correspondence between the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect and the lottery value set for each stop effect pattern for each effect lottery state (mode). Stipulate.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, in this embodiment, 28 types of stop effect patterns (pattern Nos. 0 to 27) are provided as reel stop effect patterns in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the pseudo bonus. .

  Pattern No. The stop effect patterns 0 to 19 correspond to the normal stop patterns described above. For example, pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of 0 stop production pattern “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle stage REG aligned)” is as follows. First, after the reel operation control in the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. Thereafter, the left reel 3L is stopped in the first round, the middle reel 3C is stopped in the second round, and the right reel is stopped in the third round. At this time, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “BAR” is stopped in the middle area of the right reel 3R. To do. That is, a specific symbol combination (“red 7”-“red 7”-“BAR”: REG alignment) related to the start of the pseudo RB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 0 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described with reference to FIG. 10A.

  Also, for example, pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of No. 5 stop effect pattern “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” is as follows. First, after the reel operation control in the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. Thereafter, the left reel 3L is stopped in the first round, the middle reel 3C is stopped in the second round, and the right reel is stopped in the third round. At this time, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “red 7” is stopped in the middle area of the right reel 3R. Stop. That is, a specific symbol combination (“red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7”: BIG aligned) related to the start of the pseudo BB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern 5 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described with reference to FIG. 10B.

  Pattern No. Twenty stop effect patterns “normal rotation → third cylinder long → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” correspond to the long stop pattern described in FIG. Also, the pattern No. The stop production pattern 21 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle stage REG aligned) → restart left → stop position 6 (crossdown BIG aligned)” is the restart pattern (B after stop) described in FIG. Corresponding to Furthermore, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern 22 of “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle stage REG aligned) → restart right → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” is the restart pattern (after stop A) described in FIG. Correspond.

  Pattern No. 23 stop production patterns “normal rotation → shift stop → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” correspond to the high-speed stop pattern described in FIG. Also, the pattern No. The 24 stop effect patterns “stop shaking” correspond to the shaking stop pattern described in FIG. Furthermore, the pattern No. The 25 stop effect pattern “all stop” corresponds to an all cylinder simultaneous stop pattern (not shown) in which all reels stop simultaneously after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed.

  Pattern No. 26 stop production patterns “long freeze A → normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” are executed when “freeze A” or “short lock + freeze A” is won by reel lock lottery. This is a reel stop pattern. In this stop effect pattern, the pattern No. described above is used. A freeze of 30000 msec occurs before 5 stop effect patterns. Also, the pattern No. 27 stop effect patterns “long freeze B → normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” are executed when “freeze B” or “short lock + freeze B” is won by the reel lock lottery. This is a reel stop pattern. In this stop effect pattern, the pattern No. described above is used. A freeze of 2000 msec occurs before 5 stop effect patterns.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, when the pseudo bonus is started and no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo bonus, various stop effect patterns are generated as the mode value increases. May be chosen. For example, in the reel effect lottery process when the pseudo BB starts and no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. No. 5 stop effect pattern is won, and pattern No. 5 has a probability of 6/256. 6 stop effect patterns win. In this case, in the reel production lottery process, the pattern No. 7-9, 17-19, 23, and 24 stop effect pattern wins, pattern No. 5 with a probability of 5/256. The stop effect pattern of any one of 15, 16 and 25 is won. Furthermore, in the reel production lottery process in this case, the pattern No. Any stop production pattern of 20 to 22 wins.

[Long weight lottery table at the start of pseudo bonus]
Next, various pseudo bonus start long weight lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A to 63D. The pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in a unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus.

  FIG. 63A is a pseudo weight start long weight lottery table that is referred to when a pseudo BB (1G ream) stock lottery at the start of pseudo RB is non-winning. FIG. 63B shows a pseudo lottery at the start of pseudo BB. This is a pseudo-bonus start long weight lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of BB (1G ream) is non-winning. FIG. 63C is a pseudo-bonus start long weight lottery table which is referred to when the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo RB is won, and FIG. 63D shows the pseudo BB start time. This is a pseudo-bonus starting long weight lottery table that is referred to when a pseudo-BB (1G ream) stock lottery is won.

  The long weight lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus defines a correspondence relationship between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) and the lottery value set for each lottery result.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63D, when the pseudo BB (1G series) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus is non-winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is non-winning. It becomes the composition which becomes. On the other hand, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is won, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is won with a probability of 26/256.

[Long weight generation game lottery table]
Next, various long wait occurrence game lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The long weight generation game lottery table is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus. FIG. 64 is a long weight generating game lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is non-winning. FIGS. 65A and 65B are diagrams at the start of the pseudo BB. It is a long weight generation | occurrence | production game lottery table referred when the pseudo lottery (1G ream) stock lottery is non-winning. FIG. 66 is a long weight generation game lottery table which is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is won. FIGS. 67A and 67B are diagrams when the pseudo BB starts. It is a long weight generation game lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is a win.

  The long weight generation game lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between a game capable of generating a long weight effect (short lock) and a lottery value set for each game. In the pseudo RB long weight generation game lottery table, the games of the first game to the twentieth game are defined as the games that can generate the long weight effect (short lock), and the pseudo BB long weight generation game lottery table. In the table, games of the first game to the 70th game are defined as games in which a long weight effect (short lock) can be generated.

  In this embodiment, when the pseudo lottery (1G ream) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus is non-winning, as described above, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is non-winning. In the lottery process using the long weight generation game lottery table of FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 referred to in this case, “no occurrence” is always won. On the other hand, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is a win, a long weight effect (short lock occurrence) occurs. In the lottery process using the long weight occurrence game lottery table, a lottery result other than “no occurrence” is always won.

  For example, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G run) at the start of the pseudo RB is a win, as shown in FIG. 66, the second to fourth games are generated as long-weight effects with a probability of 10/256. And any one of the 17th to 20th games is selected, and any one of the 5th, 6th, and 16th games is selected as a long-weighted production game with a probability of 11/256, with a probability of 17/256. One of the seventh to fifteenth games is selected as a game for generating a long weight effect. Further, for example, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo BB is a win, as shown in FIG. 67A and FIG. 67B, as a game in which a long weight effect is generated with a probability of 2/256 Any one of the 2nd to 10th games and the 61st to 70th games is selected, and any one of the 11th to 26th games and the 45th to 60th games is generated as a long weight production game with a probability of 4/256. One of the 27th to 44th games is selected as a game for generating a long weight effect with a probability of 5/256.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the lottery value of the first game is “0”, and the long game effect is not generated in the game of the first game.

[Long weight lottery table with pseudo bonus]
Next, the pseudo bonus medium long weight lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The pseudo bonus medium long weight lottery table is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 91 described later) performed for each unit game during the pseudo bonus game period.

  The pseudo-long bonus lottery table specifies the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) and the lottery value set for each lottery result for each lottery opportunity. To do.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the long weight lottery during the pseudo bonus is performed when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G ream) in the pseudo bonus is won and the bonus combination is won internally. . Then, the internal winning combination of a rare combination (name “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, “Determined” or “Choche”) corresponding to the effect winning lottery flag) and the pseudo BB (1G ream) stock lottery In the case of winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is won with a probability of 32/256.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 53 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, and the like used for various reel effects (various game locks).

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area and carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 33 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 33, when “1” stands for a predetermined bit (when stored), the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. It shows that. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area. The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 33, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of symbol combinations corresponding to the respective bits is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with a carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. However, bit 1 to bit 7 of the storage area are unused.

  As a result of the internal lottery, when an internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination (display combination) with the name “C_BB” is determined as an internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is a predetermined area in the carryover combination storing area as a carryover combination. (Bit 0 area). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is displayed until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination “replay 3”-“watermelon 1”-“red 7”) of the name “C_BB” is displayed on the active line. Retained without being cleared. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery. That is, in the RT1 gaming state (the state between the BB flags) in which various games in the various effect gaming states described above are performed, there is a state in which “1” is stored in the bit 0 area of the internal winning combination storing area and the carryover combination storing area. Maintained.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus gaming state type or RT gaming state type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage area 1.

  In the game state flag storage area 1, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, it indicates that a bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the BB is operating, indicating the BB gaming state, and “1” is stored in bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area 1. When RB is stored, the RB is activated and indicates the RB gaming state. Further, for example, when “1” is stored in bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, it indicates that a game is being played in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), and the gaming state flag storage area 1 When “1” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that a game is being played in the RT1 gaming state (the state between the BB flags).

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 51 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code of the symbol of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage region 1 in the cross-down line) and the displayable role (symbol code storage region in the cross-down line) 2-34) are stored. In addition, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage area (the symbol code storage area 2 to 134 in the cross-down line) in which the symbols that can be displayed are stored after all reels are stopped.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 37), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG.

[Push order flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the push order flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the push order flag storage area is composed of push order flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. Each bit is assigned the correct push order of the stop button (the type of the push order bell that is won internally).

  In each of the push order flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored in a predetermined bit, the push order bell (name “F_123B1” to “F_321B2”) corresponding to the predetermined bit is stored. ), That is, an internal winning combination related to the operation of the AT function is won. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the push order bell has not won.

  For example, when the name “F_123B1” is won internally, that is, when the correct push order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the push order flag storage area 1. . In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect gaming state is a pseudo bonus state and “1” is stored in a predetermined bit of the push order flag storage area, the correct answer of the stop button corresponding to the predetermined bit Is notified of the push order (push order navigation is executed). At this time, under the control of the main control circuit 41, information on the correct push order of the stop buttons is notified by the push order instruction display section (not shown) provided in the pedestal section 12 described above, and the sub control circuit 42 Push order navigation using the lamp group 21 is also performed under control.

[Direction game state storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the configuration of the effect game state storage area will be described. The effect game state storage area stores an effect game state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the effect game state flag, a corresponding effect game state is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the effect game state is the general game state, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the effect game state storage area. Further, for example, when the effect gaming state is in the notification waiting state, “1” is stored in bit 1 of the effect gaming state storage area, and when the effect gaming state is in the waiting state, the effect gaming state is stored. “1” is stored in bit 2 of the area. Further, for example, when the effect game state is the pseudo RB state, “1” is stored in bit 3 of the effect game state storage area, and when the effect game state is the pseudo BB state, the effect game state is stored. “1” is stored in bit 4 of the area.

[Direction lottery state storage area]
Next, the structure of the effect lottery state storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The effect lottery state storage area stores an effect lottery state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the effect lottery state flag, a corresponding effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) is assigned to each bit. For example, when the effect lottery state is mode 2, “1” is stored in bit 2 of the effect lottery state storage area.

<Various names of internal winning combination used in sub CPU control>
77, the names of internal winning combinations (hereinafter referred to as “sub-winning names”) managed on the sub-control circuit 42 side (hereinafter referred to as “sub-side”) and the main control circuit 41 side (hereinafter referred to as “main-side”). )), A correspondence table with the name of the internal winning combination described above (hereinafter referred to as “main winning combination name”) is shown. The correspondence table shown in FIG. 77 shows the correspondence between the sub-winning combination names managed on the sub-side and the main winning combination names, effect lottery flag names, and main small-combination winning numbers managed on the main side.

  The effect lottery flag name is a flag name referred to in the above-described pseudo bonus lottery table. The main small combination winning number is information relating to an internal winning combination set in a start command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The main winning combination names “losing” and “F_BB” are referred to as the sub-winning winning names “losing” and “BB”, respectively. Note that “0” is associated with the main small combination winning numbers of the main winning combination names “losing” and “F_BB”. That is, the main small combination winning number “0” is associated with the sub-winning combination names “losing” and “BB”.

  The main winning combination name “F_Replay” is referred to as a sub winning combination name “Replay” on the sub-side. Note that “1” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_Replay”. That is, the main small combination winning number “1” is associated with the sub winning combination name “Replay”.

  Each of the main winning combination names “F_123B1” to “F_321B1” is referred to as a sub-winning combination name “push order bell” on the sub side. Note that “2” is associated with the main small combination winning numbers of the main winning combination names “F_123B1” to “F_321B1”. That is, the main small combination winning number “2” is associated with the sub winning combination name “push order bell”.

  The main winning combination names “F_common B1” and “F_common B2” are both referred to as the sub winning combination name “common bell” on the sub-side. Note that “3” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_Common B1”, and “4” is associated with the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_Common B2”. It is associated. That is, the main small combination winning number “3” or “4” is associated with the sub winning combination name “common bell”.

  The main winning combination name “F_Special CH” is referred to as the sub winning combination name “Cherry” on the sub-side. Note that “5” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_special CH”. That is, the main small combination winning number “5” is associated with the sub winning combination name “Cherry”.

  The main winning combination names “F_special S1” and “F_special S2” are both referred to as the sub winning combination name “watermelon” on the sub-side. Note that “6” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_special S1”, and “7” is associated with the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_special S2”. It is associated. That is, the main small combination winning number “6” or “7” is associated with the sub winning combination name “watermelon”.

  The main winning combination names “F_special SP1” and “F_special SP2” are both referred to as the sub winning combination name “determined combination” on the sub-side. Note that “8” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_special SP1”, and “9” is associated with the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_special SP2”. It is associated. That is, the main small combination winning number “8” or “9” is associated with the sub-winning combination name “determined combination”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special SP3” is referred to as the sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry” on the sub-side. Note that “10” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_special SP3”. That is, the main small combination winning number “10” is associated with the sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special SPCH” is referred to as the sub winning combination name “middle cherry” on the sub-side. Note that “11” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_special SPCH”. That is, the main small combination winning number “11” is associated with the sub winning combination name “middle stage cherry”.

  Also, the main winning combination names “F_RB combination 1” and “F_RB combination 2” are both referred to as the sub-winning combination name “RB combination” on the sub side. Note that “12” is associated with the main small combination winning number of the main winning combination name “F_RB combination 1”, and “13” is included in the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_RB combination 2”. It is associated. That is, the main small combination winning number “12” or “13” is associated with the sub winning combination name “RB combination”.

<Various name of sub effect flag used in various effect lottery processes on the sub side>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs a determination process of winning / non-winning of the pseudo bonus, that is, winning / non-winning of the AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-winning role (sub-winning role name) described in FIG. 77 and the success / failure of the AT are used as a flag (hereinafter referred to as “sub-direction flag”) used when determining the production content on the sub side. Use a combination of The sub effect flag indicates a specific example of the effect parameter according to the present invention.

  FIG. 78 shows the correspondence between the main small role winning number and AT winning type managed on the main side, the name of the sub effect flag managed on the sub side, and the sub effect flag number associated with each sub effect flag. Show. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, a sub effect flag number is separately provided for each type of gaming state (normal, pseudo BB, pseudo RB). However, in this example, the association between the sub effect flag and the sub effect flag number is the same regardless of the type of the gaming state (normal game, pseudo BB, pseudo RB), but the present invention is not limited to this. The association between the sub effect flag and the sub effect flag number may be changed for each type of gaming state (normal, pseudo BB, pseudo RB).

  The sub effect flag of the name “losing” is when the main small role winning number is “0” (sub-winning role name “losing” or “BB”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not winning. It is a sub effect flag set in a unit game (game). Then, “0” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “losing”. Also, in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game won by the next game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo RB, a sub effect flag of the name “watermelon, cherry + pseudo BB” described later is basically set. The sub effect flag number “0” is set in the same manner as the sub effect flag “losing”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Replay + Pseudo BB” has a main small role winning number “1” (sub-winning role name “Replay”), and the current game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo BB is won in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game when played. The sub effect flag of the name “push order bell + pseudo BB” has a main small role winning number “2” (sub win combination name “push order bell”), and the current game pseudo BB or next game in the normal game. This is a sub effect flag set in the game when the pseudo BB is won. In addition, the sub effect flag of the name “common bell + pseudo BB” has the main small role winning number “3” or “4” (sub-winning role name “common bell”), and the current game simulation in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game when BB or the next game simulation BB is won. The sub effect flag number “1” is set in each of the sub effect flags “replay + pseudo BB”, “push order bell + pseudo BB”, and “common bell + pseudo BB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Replay + Pseudo RB” has a main small role winning number “1” (sub-winning role name “Replay”), and the current game pseudo RB or the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is the sub effect flag set in the game when played. The sub effect flag of the name “push order bell + pseudo RB” has the main small role winning number “2” (sub win combination name “push order bell”) and the current game pseudo RB or the next game in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game when the pseudo RB is won. In addition, the sub effect flag of the name “common bell + pseudo RB” has the main small role winning number “3” or “4” (sub-winning role name “common bell”), and in the normal game, It is a sub effect flag set in the unit game (game) when the RB or the next game pseudo RB is won. The sub effect flag number “2” is set for each of the sub effect flags “replay + pseudo RB”, “push order bell + pseudo RB”, and “common bell + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Replay” is set in the game when the main small role winning number is “1” (sub-winning role name “Replay”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub production flag. The sub effect flag “Replay” is set to “3” as the sub effect flag number.

  The sub effect flag of the name “push order bell” is when the main small role winning number is “2” (sub winning combination name “push order bell”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub effect flag set in the game. In the sub effect flag “push order bell”, “4” is set as the sub effect flag number.

  The sub effect flag of the name “common bell” has the main small role winning number “3” or “4” (sub-winning role name “common bell”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub effect flag set in the game of time. The sub effect flag “common bell” is set to “5” as the sub effect flag number.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Watermelon” is when the main small role winning number is “6” or “7” (sub-winning role name “Watermelon”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub effect flag set in the game. The sub effect flag “watermelon” is set to “6” as the sub effect flag number.

  The sub effect flag of the name “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)” has the main small role winning number “6” or “7” (sub-winning role name “watermelon”), and the next game in the normal game This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when the pseudo BB is won or when the 1G stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, “7” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)”. In the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game in which the sub effect flag “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G run)” is set, the sub effect flag becomes “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G run)”. In this case, “7” is set as the sub effect flag number, but when the sub effect flag is a sub effect flag other than “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)”, the sub effect flag number is “ “0” is set.

  The sub effect flag of the name “watermelon + pseudo RB” has the main small role winning number “6” or “7” (sub-winning role name “watermelon”), and the next game pseudo RB has won in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game of time. Then, “8” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “watermelon + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Cherry” is set in the game when the main small role winning number is “5” (sub-winning role name “Cherry”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub production flag. The sub effect flag “Cherry” is set to “9” as the sub effect flag number.

  The sub effect flag of the name “cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G run)” has a main small role winning number “5” (sub-winning role name “Cherry”), and the next game pseudo BB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in a game when a game is won or when a 1G-unit stock lottery is won in a pseudo bonus game. Then, “10” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G run)”. In the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game in which the sub production flag “Cherry + Pseudo BB (Cherry + 1G run)” is set, the sub production flag becomes “Cherry + Pseudo BB (Cherry + 1G run)”. In this case, “10” is set as the sub effect flag number, but when the sub effect flag is a sub effect flag other than “Cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G run)”, the sub effect flag number is “ “0” is set.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Cherry + Pseudo RB” is a game when the main small role winning number is “5” (sub-winning role name “Cherry”) and the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. It is a sub production flag to be set. Then, “11” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “cherry + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “determined combination” has the main small role winning number “8” or “9” (sub-winning combination name “determined combination”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub effect flag set in the game of time. Then, “12” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “determined combination”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “determined combination + pseudo BB (determined combination + 1G series)” has a main small combination winning number “8” or “9” (sub-winning combination name “determined combination”), and a normal game The sub effect flag set in the game when the next game simulation BB is won or when the 1G stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, “13” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “determined combination + pseudo BB (determined combination + 1G run)”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “determined combination + pseudo RB” has a main small role winning number “8” or “9” (sub-winning combination name “determined combination”), and the next game pseudo-RB is a normal game. This is a sub effect flag set in the game when winning. Then, “14” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “determined combination + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “determined cherry” is a game when the main small role winning number is “10” (sub-winning role name “determined cherry”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub production flag to be set. Then, “15” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “confirmed cherry”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “determined cherry + pseudo BB (determined cherry + 1G series)” has a main small role winning number “10” (sub-winning role name “determined cherry”), and the next game is simulated in a normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in a game when BB is won or when a 1G-unit stock lottery is won in a pseudo bonus game. Then, “16” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “determined cherry + pseudo BB (determined cherry + 1G run)”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “confirmed cherry + pseudo RB” has a main small role winning number “10” (sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry”), and when the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game. Then, “17” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “confirmed cherry + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “middle stage cherry” is a game when the main small role winning number is “11” (sub-winning role name “middle stage cherry”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. It is a sub production flag to be set. Then, “18” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “middle stage cherry”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “middle stage cherry + pseudo BB (middle stage cherry + 1G series)” has the main small role winning number “11” (sub-winning role name “middle stage cherry”), and the next game simulation in the normal game This is a sub-effect flag that is set in a game when BB is won or when a 1G-unit stock lottery is won in a pseudo bonus game. Then, “19” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “middle cherry + pseudo BB (middle cherry + 1G run)”.

  Further, the sub effect flag of the name “middle stage cherry + pseudo RB” has the main small role winning number “11” (sub-winning role name “middle stage cherry”), and the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. It is a sub effect flag set in the game of time. Then, “20” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “middle stage cherry + pseudo RB”.

  It is to be noted that whether or not the AT (pseudo bonus) is won (including the 1G consecutive wins) is determined on the sub-side, the number of pseudo bonus stocks included in the received start command (value of the effect reservation counter) Based on. Specifically, the sub-side determines whether or not the current game has won an AT (pseudo bonus) based on the difference between the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the current game and the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the previous game. Is done. For example, if the number of pseudo bonus stocks in the current game is increased by “1” from the number of pseudo bonus stocks in the previous game, it is determined that the AT (pseudo bonus) has been won. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only when winning an AT (pseudo bonus) in a normal game, but also when winning a 1G stock lottery in a pseudo bonus game, the sub side wins an AT (pseudo bonus). It is determined.

  Further, the determination of the type of AT (pseudo bonus) on the sub-side is also performed based on the information regarding the type of AT (pseudo bonus) included in the received start command.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment having a specification for determining whether or not the AT (pseudo bonus) is won on the main side, as described above, the combination of the internal winning combination and the success or failure of the AT (pseudo bonus) is set on the sub side. The sub effect flag is generated, and the contents of various effects controlled on the sub side are determined using the sub effect flag. In this way, by combining the internal winning combination and the success or failure of AT (pseudo bonus), it becomes possible to reduce various processes such as subsequent production determination and to reduce the amount of data such as the data table accompanying lottery. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not the AT (pseudo bonus) is won can also be determined on the sub side in the above-described sub effect flag generation process. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to transmit information indicating the state at the time of command transmission from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In this case, the control burden on the main side can be reduced.

<Composition of production instruction command>
As described above, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing various reel effects (pseudo bonus start spinning effect, long weight effect, freeze, etc.) at the start of the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, consistency between the reel effect controlled on the main side and the effects by various effect devices (display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R, etc.) at the time of the reel effect controlled on the sub side ( In order to improve the (accuracy), a command called “effect instruction command” is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 for each of various operation triggers in the reel effect. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 executes an effect corresponding to each type of trigger based on information on the trigger type of the reel effect included in the received effect instruction command (effect instruction parameter described later).

[Basic configuration of various commands]
First, before describing the data structure of the production instruction command, the basic structure (basic format) of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a basic (overall) configuration of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 is composed of a command type section in which command type information is stored and a parameter field section in which various information relating to games and effects are stored. Is done.

  The command type part is provided at the head part of the command and is composed of 8 bits (1 byte).

  The parameter field part is composed of five data storage areas called “first parameter” to “fifth parameter”. In this embodiment, since the command transmission / reception operation is repeatedly performed in units of 8 bits, the parameter field portion is also managed in units of 8 bits, and each parameter is configured by a data storage area of 8 bits (1 byte). That is, the number of bytes (data amount) of the entire command is 6 bytes (48 bits).

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the parameter field portion is configured by the first parameter to the fifth parameter, that is, an example in which the data length of the parameter field portion is a fixed length will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. . Depending on the type of command, the content of the information included in the command and the amount of data differ, so the data length of the parameter field portion may be variable for each command type. For example, depending on the command type, the parameter field portion may be composed of the first parameter to the third parameter, or may be composed of only the first parameter. In this case, the amount of command data can be reduced to the minimum necessary amount.

[Data structure of direction command]
Next, the structure of the effect instruction command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the configuration in units of bits of the effect instruction command and the contents of various information stored in each bit. In the present embodiment, the storage area for the fifth parameter of the effect instruction command is unused.

(1) Command Type A value “21H” (hexadecimal number: “00100001” in binary number) indicating the type of the production instruction command is stored in the command type portion of the production instruction command.

(2) First Parameter In the storage area of bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the first parameter of the production instruction command, information corresponding to various operation triggers during the reel production (hereinafter referred to as “production instruction parameter”). Any of “01H” to “10H” (hexadecimal number) is stored. Also, the storage area for bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) of the first parameter is unused.

  The production instruction parameter “01H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 7, 8 start”. Note that “production game stop 7” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start spinning production in which the reel automatically stops with the shaking stop pattern described in FIG. 14, and “production game stop 8” corresponds to the long game production stop described in FIG. Corresponds to a pseudo bonus start spinning effect in which the reel automatically stops with a stop pattern. The action opportunity “production game stop 7, 8 start” is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the start of the pseudo bonus start turning effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “01H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is the main control. The data is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “02H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 7, 8 end”. The operation trigger “end of game stop for production 7, 8” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning production of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “02H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is the main control. The data is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “03H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 5 (second half), 6 start”. The “production game stop 5” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start spinning production in which the reel automatically stops with the restart pattern described in FIG. 13, and the “production game stop 6” corresponds to the high speed described in FIG. Corresponds to a pseudo bonus start spinning effect in which the reel automatically stops with a stop pattern. Then, the operation opportunity “game stop for production 5 (second half), 6 start” is the start and re-rotation of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the re-stop pattern (reel when changing “REG alignment” to “BIG alignment”) This is data indicating the start of a pseudo bonus start spinning effect of a high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the start and re-rotation of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the re-stop pattern, or at the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the high-speed stop pattern, the storage area for bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is stored. An effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “03H” is set is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “04H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 5, 6 end”. The operation opportunity “production game stop 5, 6 end” is data indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus start spinning effect of the re-stop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the re-stop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “04H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is the main control. The data is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “05H” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo-press”. The operation opportunity “pseudo-press” is data indicating that the stop button is pseudo-pressed (actually not pressed by the player) during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start spinning effect). Therefore, at the timing when the stop button is pseudo-pressed during the reel production (pseudo bonus start spinning production), the production instruction parameter “05H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. An effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42. It should be noted that the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “05H” is set is transmitted for each stop button (reel) that is pseudo-pressed.

  The effect instruction parameter “06H” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo stop”. The operation trigger “pseudo stop” is data indicating that the reel is stopped in a pseudo manner in the reel production (pseudo bonus start spinning production). Therefore, when the reel is pseudo-stopped during the reel production (pseudo bonus start spinning production), the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “06H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. Is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42.

  In addition, the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted for each reel that is pseudo-stopped. It should be noted that in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the stop pattern other than the all-synchronous simultaneous stop pattern, since the reels are pseudo-stopped one by one, the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted three times. . On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus start spinning effect of the all-synchronous simultaneous stop pattern, all reels are pseudo-stopped at the same time, so that the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted once.

  The production instruction parameter “07H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “game stop 2 production for production”. The “production game stop 2” corresponds to the long freeze A or B reel lock production. The operation opportunity “production game stop 2 start” is data indicating the start of the reel lock effect of the long freeze A or B. Therefore, when the long freeze A or B reel lock effect is started, an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “07H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is sub-controlled from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “08H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 2 end”. The operation opportunity “production game stop 2 end” is data indicating the end of the long freeze A or B reel lock effect. Therefore, at the end of the reel lock effect of long freeze A or B, an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “08H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is sub-controlled from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “09H” is data indicating an operation opportunity “game stop 1 for effect start”. The “production game stop 1” corresponds to a long weight production (short lock generation production). The operation opportunity “production game stop 1 start” is data indicating the start of a long weight production (short lock generation production). Therefore, at the start of the long-weight effect (short lock occurrence effect), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “09H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is sent from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0AH” is data indicating the operation opportunity “production game stop 1 end”. The operation opportunity “production game stop 1 end” is data indicating the end of the long weight effect (short lock generation effect). Therefore, at the end of the long weight effect (the effect of generating a short lock), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0AH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is output from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0BH” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo rotation start”. The operation trigger “pseudo-rotation start” is data indicating that the reel has started pseudo-rotation after the start of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect). Therefore, after starting the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect), when the pseudo reel starts rotating, the effect instruction in which the effect instruction parameter “0BH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. A command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In this embodiment, when a reel effect without a short lock (pseudo bonus start spinning effect) is executed, a reel rotation start command is issued before the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0BH” is set. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0CH” is data indicating the operation opportunity “production game stop 4 start”. Note that “game play for effect 4” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start spinning effect in which the reels are pseudo-stopped with the normal stop pattern (“REG alignment”) at the start of the pseudo RB, as described with reference to FIG. 10A. The operation opportunity “production game stop 4 start” is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0CH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is received. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0DH” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 4 end”. The operation opportunity “production game stop 4 end” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0DH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is received. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0EH” is data indicating the operation opportunity “production game stop 3 start”. Note that “game stop for effect 3” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start spinning effect in which the reels are pseudo-stopped in the normal stop pattern (“BIG aligned”) at the start of pseudo BB, as described in FIG. 10B. The action opportunity “production game stop 3 start” is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0EH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is received. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0FH” is data indicating an operation opportunity “production game stop 3 end”. The operation opportunity “end of game stop for production 3” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning production of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0FH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is received. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “10H” is data indicating an operation trigger “rotation restart”. The operation opportunity “resumption of rotation” is data indicating that the normal acceleration operation of the reel is started after the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect) is completed. Therefore, when the normal acceleration operation of the reel is started after the end of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect), the effect instruction parameter “10H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

(3) Second parameter The second parameter of the production instruction command is a pseudo depression when “05H” is set as the production instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is “pseudo depression”). The information corresponding to the target reel (hereinafter referred to as “pressing cylinder”) is stored. Note that the data of the pressing cylinder is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 2 (b2) of the second parameter of the effect instruction command. Also, the storage area of bit 3 (b3) to bit 7 (b7) of the second parameter is unused.

  The rotation pressing “001” is data indicating that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed is the left reel 3L, and the rotation pressing “010” is data indicating that the target reel to be pseudo-pressing is the middle reel 3C. Yes, the spinning press “100” is data indicating that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed is the right reel 3R.

(4) Third parameter The third parameter of the production instruction command is a pseudo depression when “05H” is set as the production instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is “pseudo depression”). Information corresponding to the symbol position of the reels (hereinafter referred to as “pressed position”) is stored. Specifically, information corresponding to any of the symbol positions “0” to “19” described in FIG. 17 is stored in the third parameter as the data of the pressed position. The data of the pressed position is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the third parameter of the effect instruction command. Also, the storage area of bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) of the third parameter is unused.

(5) Fourth parameter In the fourth parameter of the effect instruction command, when “05H” is set as the effect instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is “pseudo press”), the pseudo press Information corresponding to the scheduled stop position of the symbol on the reels (hereinafter referred to as “scheduled stop position”) is stored. Specifically, information corresponding to any of the symbol positions “0” to “19” described with reference to FIG. 17 is stored in the fourth parameter as data of the scheduled stop position. Note that the data of the scheduled press position is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the fourth parameter of the effect instruction command. Also, the storage area of bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) of the fourth parameter is unused.

  As described above, when an effect instruction command including information indicating the trigger is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 at various triggers during the reel effect, the sub side corresponds to each trigger of the reel effect. The produced performance can be executed accurately and reliably. Further, as in this embodiment, by subdividing the transmission timing of the effect instruction command during the reel effect, the deviation between the reel effect controlled on the main side and the various effects controlled on the sub side can be corrected. it can.

  In addition, by providing the above-described effect instruction command transmission function, for example, it is possible to produce effects such as shifting the output timing of the reel rotation start sound and the reel rotation start timing, such as a long weight effect. Can be performed. As a result, the player's interest in reel production can be enhanced.

<Other characteristic functions>
Next, various other various functions provided in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[Wait sound generation function]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a wait sound is generated at the start of the game if the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has not elapsed. In addition, in the unit game in which the pseudo bonus starts and the pseudo bonus starts and the pseudo-bonus starts, the weight sound generation condition is satisfied (at the start of the previous game) When the wait time (4.1 sec) has not elapsed from the time), a wait sound is generated, and when the wait sound generation condition is not satisfied (such as when a long freeze occurs), no wait sound is generated.

  In a game that generates a pseudo bonus start spinning effect, by providing such a function for generating a weight sound, a weight sound is also generated in a pseudo bonus notification game in which a pseudo bonus start spinning effect is generated in the same manner as in a normal game. appear. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the state at the start of the pseudo bonus notification game is locked, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect.

[Control function of lighting mode of stop button]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, each stop button is provided with a lighting lamp (not shown) indicating whether the player's operation with respect to the stop button is valid / invalid. When the player's operation on the stop button is invalid, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment lights the stop button in red with a lighting lamp (second notification mode), and the player's operation on the stop button When the operation is in a valid state, the stop button is lit in blue with a lighting lamp (first notification mode). In addition, the lighting lamp provided in each stop button shows a specific example of the notification device according to the present invention.

  The operation (switching) control of the stop button lighting mode is performed by the sub-control circuit 42 (sub-side). Specifically, when the sub control circuit 42 receives a constant speed start command described later, the sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of all stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Further, when the sub control circuit 42 receives a reel stop command described later, the sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the target reel of the received reel stop command to red lighting (invalid lighting mode). Change. Note that, even under conditions of blue lighting (effective lighting mode), if another operation (lever input or the like) is detected, the sub-control circuit 42 sets the lighting mode of the stop button to blue lighting (effective lighting). Mode) to red lighting (ineffective lighting mode).

  As described above, the amount of processing and data in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be reduced by managing the lighting state of each stop button by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side).

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, even during the pseudo bonus start spinning effect as described above, the pseudo rotation start operation and stop operation of each reel, the pseudo stop operation (pseudo press) for each reel, and the like A production instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 at every opportunity. In the present embodiment, the stop button lighting mode operation (switching) control described above may be performed at the time of receiving the effect instruction command even during the pseudo bonus start spinning effect.

  For example, in addition to the type described with reference to FIG. 80, as the type of production instruction parameter, there is provided an production instruction parameter indicating that the reel rotation speed has reached a specific speed (pseudo constant speed) after the start of pseudo rotation of the reel. When an effect instruction command in which data associated with “pseudo constant speed” is set as an effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side) during the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, the sub control The circuit 42 may change the lighting mode of all the stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Further, in this case, during the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, when an effect instruction command in which “pseudo press” (05H) is set as an effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side), The sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the pseudo-pressed stop button to red lighting (ineffective lighting mode).

  In addition, the control of the lighting mode of each stop button during the pseudo bonus start spinning effect (reel effect) is executed by the sub-control circuit 42 as described above. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 controls means (pseudo notification control) for controlling the lighting mode (notification mode) of the stop button based on the effect instruction command received during the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect). Means).

  In this way, during the pseudo-bonus start spinning effect (reel effect), the state at the start of the pseudo-bonus notification game is locked by performing the lighting effect of each stop button as in the normal time. Is less likely to be recognized by the player, and a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect can be suppressed. Note that the constant reel speed (pseudo constant speed) during the pseudo-bonus start spinning effect may be the same as or different from that at the normal time.

[Management function of demo migration]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the period from the end of the medal payout until the medal insertion (including automatic insertion) of the next game is in a non-game state. In the present embodiment, the duration of the non-gaming state is monitored, and when the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period, the state of the demonstration (hereinafter simply referred to as “demo”) and / or the state of the power saving mode is set. Set. In this case, for example, the segment is turned off or a demonstration image is displayed.

  And in the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the monitoring of the continuation time of a non-game state is each independently performed independently at the main side and the sub side. Specifically, a timer for monitoring the duration of the non-gaming state is separately provided on each of the main side and the sub side. Then, both timers are set so that the monitoring start timing of the non-gaming state duration on the main side and the determination timing of the demo transition are substantially coincident with those on the sub side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the demo and / or power saving mode, the main control circuit 41 (main side) performs the demonstration and / or power saving mode state (non-game). Specific processing (for power saving state) (various power saving processing, etc.) is performed by the sub-control circuit 42 (sub-side). It is started at substantially the same timing as the effect process (demonstration image display process, etc.).

  By providing the non-game state monitoring function of the present embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot, a command called a “demo command” is transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit when starting the demo and / or power saving mode. Then, the sub control circuit performs demonstration control for the state of the demo and / or the power saving mode with the reception of the demo command as a trigger.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the duration of the non-game state is monitored independently on each of the main side and the sub side, it is not necessary to provide a demo command. In this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

[Medal payout count function]
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function (payout sound output function) of outputting a payout sound for notifying that during the medal payout process from the speakers 20L and 20R. The operation of the payout sound output function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, every time a command called “credit information command” indicating the medal payout operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, one medal is paid out and a payout sound is generated. appear. Therefore, at the time of winning a small combination, a credit information command (payout execution data) for the number of medals corresponding to the small combination is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, and a payout sound is generated. That is, the credit information command is continuously transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 at the payout operation interval of one medal for the number of medals paid out corresponding to the winning small combination, and the payout sound Occurs.

  At this time, the sub-control circuit 42 counts the number of times the credit information command is continuously received, and when the number of times the credit information command is received reaches the payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small role, Stop the output control. That is, the sub control circuit 42 determines the timing of the completion of the medal payout operation based on the number of times the credit information command is received, and performs stop control of the payout sound.

  By providing the above-described medal payout number counting function, the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot, during the payout of medals, a credit information command is not only transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 each time one medal is paid out, At the end of the payout operation, for example, a command called “payout end command” indicating the end of the medal payout operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42. Then, on the sub-side, the timing of the completion of the medal payout operation is determined with the reception of the payout end command, and the payout sound output stop process is performed.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines the timing of the medal payout operation end based on the number of times the credit information command is received, and performs a payout sound output stop process. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out without using a payout end command. In this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the result of the function of counting the number of times of receiving the credit information command is used in the judgment control of the payout sound output end process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is necessary to switch the effect process with the end of the medal payout, the result of the function of counting the number of times the credit information command is received can be used for any process. For example, the result of the credit information command reception count function may be used for video switching control processing at the end of medal payout.

  Although not shown, the credit information command includes information on the number of payouts, and the information on the number of payouts is received each time a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 (one medal). Every time a payout is made, “1” is subtracted. That is, the payout number information included in the credit information command is the remaining payout number.

  In the present embodiment, a credit information command including information indicating that the number of payouts is 0 is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 even if the winning combination is a combination in which a medal such as a lose or replay is not paid out. The configuration is as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the credit information command may be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 only at the time of winning the small role.

[Medal settlement function]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player performs an operation of pressing the settlement button, and the medal settlement (payout) process is started, during the medal settlement process, the settlement sound for notifying the speaker 20L, A function for outputting from 20R (settlement sound output function) is provided. The operation of the adjusted sound output function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the player performs a pressing operation on the settlement button, a command called “settlement sound command” indicating the trigger for the settlement process of the stored (credit) medal is displayed in the main control circuit. 41 to the sub-control circuit 42. The sub-control circuit 42 sets the game state to the state of being settled with the reception of this settlement sound command (payment start data). During the medal settlement process, every time a medal is settled (paid out), a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 to generate a settlement sound. In other words, during the medal settlement process, credit information commands are continuously sent from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 at the settlement (payout) operation interval of one medal for the number of medals. It is transmitted and a settlement sound is generated.

  The credit information command includes not only information on the number of medals paid out (remaining payout number) described above, but also information on the number of medals currently credited (credit number). During the medal settlement process, the credit number is decremented by “1” every time a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 (every medal is paid out).

  Therefore, the sub-control circuit 42 outputs the adjustment sound when the current state is the adjustment state when the credit information command is received and the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command is “1” or more. (Request) control. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 completes the settlement (payout) of all credited medals when the information on the number of credits included in the received credit information command becomes “0” in the settlement process. If so, the settlement process is stopped. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 42 cancels the state of adjustment and performs output stop processing of the adjustment sound.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a state in which the adjustment sound continues to sound due to a cause such as a power interruption, the current state is the adjustment state when the no-operation command is received, the number of credits is zero, and When the adjustment sound is being output, the sub-control circuit 42 performs the adjustment sound output stop process.

  The no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 when there is no transmission data related to an operation essential to the game (for example, various commands such as a start command, a reel stop command, and a display command described later). Command. Although not shown, the no-operation command includes information regarding invalid operations such as lever operation, BET operation (press operation of the MAX bet button 14 by the player), and stop button ON / OFF operation, for example, when the command is not valid. included.

  By providing the above-described medal settlement function (payment end function), the following effects can be obtained. In the general pachislot, during the settlement of medals, a credit information command is not only transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 every time a medal is settled, as in this embodiment, At the end of the medal settlement operation, a payout end command indicating the end of the medal payout (settlement) operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42. On the sub-side, when the payout end command is received, the timing of the completion of the medal settlement operation is determined, and the settlement sound output stop control is performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines the timing of completion of the medal settlement (payout) operation based on the presence / absence of the settlement process and the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the output stop control of the adjustment sound without using the payout end command. In this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

  In this embodiment, the example of using the result of the medal settlement function (settlement termination function) in the judgment control of the settlement sound output termination process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The result of the medal settlement function can be used for any process as long as it is necessary to switch the effect process with the completion of the medal settlement. For example, the result of the medal settlement function may be used for video switching control processing at the end of settlement.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 81 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, various initialization processes when changing settings, a process for determining whether backup has been performed normally, and the like are performed. Details of the initialization process at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, medal sensor (not shown), start switch 16S input check process, demo transition determination process, and the like are performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs processing for acquiring a random value for internal winning combination lottery (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 obtains various effect random numbers for determining contents related to operations such as an AT (pseudo bonus) function, a reel lock function, and a pseudo bonus start spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 51 produces a random number value for effect for pseudo bonus lottery (0 to 65535), a random number value for effect for pseudo BB stock lottery (0 to 255), and an effect for lottery for the next pseudo bonus transition game number. Random number value (0-255), Reel random lottery value (0-255), Reel stop effect pattern lottery value (0-255), Mode transition lottery value (0 to 255), a random number value (0 to 255) for rendering for long weight lottery is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery process when the lever is on (S7). In this process, based on the random numbers for various effects extracted in S5 and the internal winning combination determined in S6, the operation contents such as the AT (pseudo bonus) function, the reel lock function, the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, etc. Various lottery processes are performed. Details of the lever-on lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command generation / storage process (S9). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes an internal winning combination (main small combination winning number), presence / absence of a pseudo bonus (value of an effect reservation counter), presence / absence of a reel lock, presence / absence of a pseudo bonus start spinning effect, notification lamp status Information on various lottery results such as lighting instructions is included.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a game weight digest process, a request to start rotation of all reels, a reel lock process, a reel control process for a pseudo bonus start spinning effect, and the like.

  In the wait digestion process in S10, the main CPU 51 waits until the predetermined wait time elapses if a predetermined wait time (eg, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous unit game. Digest time. Next, when it is not determined to perform the reel lock or the pseudo bonus start spinning effect at the start of the game, normal acceleration processing is performed on the three reels.

  Specifically, after a predetermined wait time is consumed, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 109, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that reel effects such as reel lock and pseudo bonus start spinning effect are performed at the start of the game, the main CPU 51 performs the above-described normal acceleration process of the reels in the process of S10. Then, data such as the determined reel lock and pseudo bonus start spinning effect are set, and those reel effects are performed. Details of the reel rotation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 displays the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23). And match. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a display combination is displayed on the active line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs display command generation / storage processing (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates display command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. By this process, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the effective line, and can determine the execution timing of various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a third post-stop effect process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs an execution process of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo bonus, an update process of the effect gaming state at the end of the pseudo bonus, and the like. The details of the third post-stop effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S13, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23), the maximum number of medals to be paid out (upper limit of payout) is seven. Become.

  Also, in the process of S16, when the player has pressed down the checkout button, the credit number of medals is paid out (settlement). Further, in this process, a main demo transition timer setting process for counting the duration time of the non-game state is also performed. The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main demo transition timer is a specific example of the first monitoring means according to the present invention.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the end timing of the bonus (BB) game provided in the main RAM 53 and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to be ended. To do. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the bonus (BB) game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Initialization at power-on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the initialization process at power-on performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a setting change switch (not shown) is in an on state (S31).

  In S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is on (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a setting change process (S32). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. After the process of S32, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization process when the power is turned on, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (in the case where S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a power interruption recovery process (S33). Details of the power interruption recovery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later. After the process of S33, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization process when the power is turned on, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the setting change process performed in S32 during the initialization process (see FIG. 82) upon power-on will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process for the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (the number of games for the next pseudo bonus transfer) (S41). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of “65535” to the number of pseudo bonus cancellation games.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery mode lottery process (S42). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines the effect lottery state (mode) with reference to the setting change mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 54) based on the changed settings (settings 1 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result (any of modes 0 to 7) of the effect lottery mode lottery process (S43). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in the bit in the effect lottery state storage area (see FIG. 76) corresponding to the lottery result (any of modes 0 to 7).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process (S44). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode) and determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this process, when mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and With reference to the correspondence table (see FIG. 56) with the random value, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number corresponding to the random value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result (next pseudo bonus transfer game number) of the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process as the pseudo bonus release game number (S45). After the process of S45, the main CPU 51 ends the setting change process and also ends the initialization process (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on.

[Power failure recovery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the power interruption recovery process performed in S33 during the initialization process (see FIG. 82) upon power-on will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S51). In this determination process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal in S51 (when S51 is YES), the main CPU 51 returns the set value to the state before the power interruption based on the backup data (S52). Then, after the process of S52, the main CPU 51 ends the power interruption recovery process and also ends the initialization process (see FIG. 82) upon power-on.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S51 that the backup is not normal (when S51 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs power-on error processing (S53). In this process, the main CPU 51 notifies that the backup is not normal by an error display or the like.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S61). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  In S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic loading request (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic loading process (S62). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal insertion command generation / storage processing (S63). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of medal insertions and the like, but the medal insertion command generated in S63 includes the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game (the number of games that can be started). Is set. Then, after the process of S63, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S61 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S61 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S64). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals according to the gaming state (S65). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S66). When the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S66 (when S66 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S66 that the main CPU 51 is permitted to accept medals (when S66 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S67). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal is inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted based on the result of the check process in S67 (S68).

  In S68, when the main CPU 51 determines that no medal is inserted (when S68 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S71 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S68 that a medal has been inserted (when S68 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage process (S69). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S70). In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is “3”.

  In S70, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S70 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S70 that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S70 is NO), or when S68 is NO, the main CPU 51 sets the main demo transition timer to “0”. Is determined (S71). The main demo transition timer setting process is performed in a medal payout process (see FIG. 106, which will be described later).

  In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main demo transition timer is not “0” (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes after S66.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S71 that the main demo transition timer is “0” (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the main demo flag to the on state (S72). By this process, the process at the time of demo transfer is started. The main demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the demo and / or power saving mode, and is stored in the main RAM 53. After the process of S72, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes after S66.

  Here, returning to the processing of S63, S66, and S70 again, after the processing of S63, if S66 is NO, or if S70 is YES, the main CPU 51 sets the main demo flag to an off state ( S73). If the game state is not in the demo and / or power saving mode at the time of this process, in this process, a process of maintaining the main demo flag in the off state is performed. On the other hand, if the state of the game is a demo and / or power saving mode at the time of this process, this process is a process of updating the main demo flag from the on state to the off state. The state of the demo and / or power saving mode ends.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S74). In S74, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when S74 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes after S66.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S74 that the start switch is on (when S74 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S75). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, the main control circuit 41 executes the process of determining whether or not the main demo transition timer during the medal acceptance / start check process of the present embodiment is “0” (S71). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether to perform processing in the demo and / or power saving mode state (non-game state) based on the monitoring result by the main demo transition timer. Also serves as (first non-gaming state determination means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S81). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) to grasp the current gaming state, and the type of internal lottery table to be used (any of the lottery tables in FIGS. 25 to 27). To decide.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random value storage area (S82). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for internal lottery (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result (subtraction result) in S83 is less than “0” (negative value) (S84). In S84, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than “0” (when S84 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (when S84 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S85). Specifically, the value of the calculation result (subtraction result) is set as a random value, and the winning number is incremented by “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S86). When it is determined in S86 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S86 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S83 and repeats the processes after S83.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S86 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when S86 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S88 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S84 again, if S84 is YES (when a digit is generated in the subtraction process), the main CPU 51 determines the data pointer for the small role / replay corresponding to the winning number where the digit is generated. And a bonus data pointer is acquired (S87).

  After the processing of S87 or when S86 is YES, the main CPU 51 refers to the symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 28 to 36), and based on the small combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination (display that can win a prize) (Sole) is acquired (S88). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination (a winning displayable combination) in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 69) (S89).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S90). In S90, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S90 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S90 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S90 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the symbol combination determination table (FIG. 28 to FIG. 28). With reference to FIG. 36, an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S91).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S92).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the carryover combination storage area and determines whether the BB is being carried over (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not carried over (when S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S93 that the BB is being carried over (when S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT1 gaming state as the gaming state (S94). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores (sets) “1” in bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70).

  After the processing of S94, or when S90 or S93 is NO, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S95). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing an internal winning combination determining process (internal winning combination determining means).

[Lottery lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the lever-on lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery flag generation process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination to the on state, and sets the other effect lottery flags to the off state. For example, when the internal winning combination with the name “F_123B1” wins, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” to the ON state (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, for example, even when an internal winning combination with the name “F_Replay” is won, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” in the on state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S102).

  In S102, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (in the case where S102 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lever-on lottery process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S8. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S102 that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (when S102 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is a notification waiting state (S103). ).

  In S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the notification waiting state (when S103 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S105 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S103 that the effect gaming state is the notification waiting state (when S103 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the waiting state in line with the effect gaming state (S104).

  After the process of S104 or when S103 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a normal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) and reel lock lottery. The details of the normal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a mode transition lottery process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs lottery transfer for the mode (effect lottery state) at the start of the pseudo bonus and the number of games for the next pseudo bonus transfer. The details of the mode transition lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs stock lottery processing (S107). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs pseudo-BB (1G ream) stock lottery and long-weight effect lottery. The details of the stock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel effect lottery processing (S108). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs lottery of the reel stop effect pattern of the pseudo bonus start spinning effect mainly performed at the start of the pseudo bonus. Details of the reel effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After the processing of S108, the main CPU 51 ends the lever-on lottery processing, and moves the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Normal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal lottery process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the normal gaming state (S111).

  In S111, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the normal gaming state (when S111 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is determined as the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). ) To S106. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S111 that the effect gaming state is the normal gaming state (when S111 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of games for releasing the pseudo bonus is “0”. It is determined whether or not the current game is a game when the ceiling is established (S112).

  In S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S112), the main CPU 51 sets the game number cancellation flag to the on state (S113). At this time, the main CPU 51 sets the other effect winning opportunity flag to the off state. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S112 that the pseudo bonus release game number is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 51 decrements the pseudo bonus release game number by 1 (S114). .

  After the process of S113 or S114, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (S115). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 38, FIG. 39, etc.), and based on the current effect lottery state (mode), setting and effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), etc. Pseudo bonus winning / non-winning, pseudo bonus type and notification timing at the time of winning (pseudo bonus types “current game pseudo RB”, “current game pseudo BB”, “next game pseudo BB” and “next game round simulation” BB ").

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result of the pseudo bonus lottery process (S116). When a pseudo bonus lottery is won, in this process, a winning bonus type setting process, an effect reservation counter value update process (1 addition), and the like are performed. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is won (S117).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S117 that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when S117 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and the process of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S106. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S117 that the pseudo bonus has been won (when S117 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number-of-games release flag is on (S118).

  In S118, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number-of-games release flag is on (when S118 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S120 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S118 that the number-of-games release flag is not in the on state (when S118 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs an effect winning opportunity flag update process (S119). In this process, the effect winning opportunity flag corresponding to the pseudo bonus winning opportunity (other than the cancellation of the number of games) is set to the on state, and the other effect winning opportunity flags are set to the off state. For example, if the lottery trigger of the pseudo bonus is “watermelon” and the pseudo bonus is won, the watermelon release flag is set to the on state and the other effect winning trigger flags are set to the off state.

  After the process of S119 or when S118 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus setting process (S120). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the initial value of the number of remaining pseudo bonus games corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus won. When the type of the pseudo bonus won is “current game pseudo BB” or “next game pseudo BB”, “70” is set as the initial value of the remaining number of pseudo bonus games, and the type of pseudo bonus won is “ In the case of “current game simulation RB” or “next game simulation RB”, “20” is set as the initial value of the remaining number of simulation bonus games.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect game state update process (S121). In this process, for example, if the type of the winning pseudo bonus is “current game simulation RB” or “current game simulation BB”, the main CPU 51 sets the waiting state in line with the effect gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores data “1” in bit 2 (aligned waiting state) of the effect gaming state storage area (see FIG. 75). Further, for example, when the type of the simulated bonus that is won is “next game simulation RB” or “next game simulation BB”, the main CPU 51 sets the notification waiting state to the effect gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores data “1” in bit 1 (notification waiting state) of the effect gaming state storage area (see FIG. 75).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs initialization processing of the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (the number of games for the next pseudo bonus transfer) (S122). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of “65535” to the number of pseudo bonus cancellation games.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock lottery process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel lock lottery table (see FIGS. 40 to 47) and displays the current effect lottery state (mode), pseudo bonus winning type, effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the like. Based on the reel lock winning / non-winning and reel locking type ("Short lock", "Freeze A", "Freeze B", "Short lock + Freeze A" and "Short lock + Freeze B") Or).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to perform reel lock based on the lottery result of the reel lock lottery process (S124). When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel lock is not performed in S124 (when S124 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel lock is to be performed in S124 (when S124 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an effect reservation flag update process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the effect reservation flag corresponding to the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery to the on state. For example, when the reel lock type determined by the reel lock lottery is “short lock”, the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the on state, and the reel lock type determined by the reel lock lottery is If it is “Freeze A”, the main CPU 51 sets the Freeze A flag to the ON state. Further, for example, when the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery is “short lock + freeze A”, the main CPU 51 sets both the short lock flag and the freeze A flag to the on state.

  Then, after the process of S125, the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and moves the process to S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, the pseudo bonus lottery process (S115) during the normal lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. Also, the pseudo control BB (1G series) stock lottery process (S107) during the normal lottery process during the lever-on lottery process described in FIG. 87 is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines means for determining whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus state (notification gaming state) and determines whether to shift to the pseudo bonus state (notification gaming state) (1G series stock). It also serves as means for determining the presence or absence (notification game determination means).

[Mode transition lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the mode transition lottery process performed in S106 in the lever-on lottery process flowchart (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all effect winning trigger flags are in an off state, or whether or not a pseudo BB stock release flag is in an on state (S131).

  In S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S131 is satisfied (when S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the mode transition lottery process, and the process of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S107. That is, in this embodiment, not only when the pseudo bonus is not started, but also when the game of the pseudo bonus is continued by the release of the 1G series pseudo BB, the mode transition lottery is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the determination condition in S131 is not satisfied (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a mode transition lottery process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 48 to 51), and presents the current effect lottery state (mode), the type of pseudo bonus to be started, the setting, and the effect lottery flag. Based on (internal winning combination), etc., the transition lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery state update process based on the lottery result of the mode transition lottery process (S133). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode) and determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this process, when mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and With reference to the correspondence table (see FIG. 56) with the random value, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number corresponding to the random value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of updating the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (S135). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the next pseudo bonus transfer game number obtained in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process as the pseudo bonus release game number. After the process of S135, the main CPU 51 ends the mode transition lottery process, and moves the process to S107 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

[Stock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, the stock lottery process performed in S107 in the lever-on lottery process flowchart (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is a normal gaming state or a notification waiting state (S141).

  In S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the normal gaming state or the waiting state for notification (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process, and the process is lottery process when the lever is on. The process moves to S108 of (see FIG. 87). On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S141 that the effect gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the notification waiting state (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is in a waiting state. Is determined (S142).

  In S142, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not complete and is not in a waiting state (when S142 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S149 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S142 that the production gaming states are all in a waiting state (when S142 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) (S143). . In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus starting pseudo BB stock lottery table (see FIGS. 57A and 57B), and based on the type of pseudo bonus to be started and the current effect lottery state (mode), BB stock winning / non-winning is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stock lottery process has been won (S144).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S144 that the stock lottery process has not been won (when S144 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S144 that the main CPU 51 has won the stock lottery process (when S144 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the value of the effect reservation counter (S145). The effect reservation counter is a counter that counts the number of pseudo BB stocks and is provided in the main RAM 53.

  After the process of S145, the main CPU 51 performs a long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) (S146). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus start long weight lottery table (see FIGS. 63A to 63D), determines the type of pseudo-bonus to be started and whether or not a stock lottery is won (whether there is a 1G series pseudo-BB) ) To determine whether the long weight effect (short lock) is won or not. Further, in this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the long wait occurrence game lottery table (see FIGS. 64 to 67), and determines the type of the pseudo bonus to be started and whether or not the stock lottery is won (the presence or absence of the 1G series pseudo BB). ) To determine the game in which the long weight effect is generated. If a long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo RB, one of the second game to the 20th game in the pseudo RB game period is determined as a game in which the long weight effect is generated. Further, when the long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo BB, any unit game of the second game to the 70th game during the pseudo BB game period is determined as the game in which the long weight effect is generated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a long weight lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) has been won (S147).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S147 that the long wait lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) has not been won (when S147 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S151 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S147 that the main CPU 51 has won the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) (when S147 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the winning result for the number of long wait occurrence games. (S148).

  After the processing of S148, or when S142 or S144 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated (S149). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated, based on the set number of long weight occurrence games and the number of remaining pseudo bonus games. .

  In S149, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is not a game with a long weight effect (when S149 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S151 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S149 that the current game is a game with a long weight effect (when S149 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the on state (S150).

  After the process of S150, or when S147 or S149 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus pseudo BB stock lottery table (see FIG. 58) and determines the stock win / non-win of the pseudo BB based on the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stock lottery process has been won (S152).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S152 that the stock lottery process has not been won (when S152 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process, and the process of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S108.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S152 that the main CPU 51 has won the stock lottery process (when S152 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a mode transition lottery process (during pseudo bonus) (S153). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus medium mode transfer lottery table (see FIGS. 52 and 53), and shifts based on the current effect lottery state (mode) and the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination). The previous effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (S154). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “65535” as the number of unlocked games for the pseudo bonus. Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery state (mode) update process based on the lottery result of the mode transition lottery process (S155).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery processing (S156). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the updated effect lottery state (mode), and determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this process, when mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus transfer game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further determines the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and With reference to the correspondence table (see FIG. 56) with the random value, the next pseudo bonus transfer game number corresponding to the random value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of updating the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the next pseudo bonus transfer game number obtained in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery process as the pseudo bonus release game number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a long weight lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S158). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus long weight lottery table (see FIG. 68) and determines whether or not there is an effect lottery flag (internal winning combination) and a stock lottery winning (the presence or absence of a 1G series pseudo-BB). Based on this, the winning / non-winning of the long weight production (short lock) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a long weight lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) has been won (S159).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S159 that the long weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has not been won (when S159 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S161 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S159 that the main CPU 51 has won the long wait lottery process (during pseudo bonus) (when S159 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the on state (S160). . If the short lock flag is already on before the processing of S160 (when the above-described processing of S150 is performed in the current game), the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is on in the processing of S160. Process to maintain.

  After the process of S160 or when S159 is NO, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the value of the effect reservation counter (S161). After the process of S161, the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process, and moves the process to S108 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not to execute the 1G-run pseudo BB after the game period of the pseudo bonus in the game (including the start game) during the pseudo bonus. (Notification game continuation determination means, notification game determination means). In the present embodiment, the long weight lottery process (S146 and S158) during the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for determining whether or not to execute a long weight effect and a long weight generation game (lock effect determining means).

[Reel production lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the reel effect lottery process performed in S108 in the lever-on lottery process flowchart (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the production gaming state is a complete waiting state (S171).

  In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not in a waiting state (when S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S171 that the effect gaming states are all in a waiting state (when S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) (S172). . In this process, referring to the pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the pseudo bonus start is based on the current effect lottery state (mode), the pseudo bonus winning type, and the presence or absence of freeze. A reel stop effect pattern (any of pattern Nos. 0 to 27) in the spinning effect is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets stop line selection information of a symbol combination (BIG aligned or REG aligned) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S173). Next, the main CPU 51 sets stop position information of the symbol combination (BIG alignment or REG alignment) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery processing (S174).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the stop order information (left middle right, right middle left, or simultaneously) of the reels to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S175). After the process of S175, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S181).

  In S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (when S181 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S183 described later. On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (when S181 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the value of the small role / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S182).

  After the processing of S182 or when S181 is YES, the main CPU 51 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and based on the acquired turning stop number, various information corresponding to the turning stop number. Is acquired (S183). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and stopped at a specific position) Information for selecting the stop table again is acquired.

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the correspondence between the number for stopping the rotation and various information such as a drawing priority table selection data and a drawing priority table number described later is defined. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reels stop at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player and to prevent erroneous winnings by using the prescribed information. Is stipulated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S184).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores “3” in a stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S185). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Reel rotation start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the reel rotation start process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to execute a reel effect (S191). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not at least one of various information (stop effect pattern) related to the effect reservation flag and the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is set. When at least one of various information related to the effect reservation flag and the pseudo bonus start spinning effect (stop effect pattern) is set, the main CPU 51 determines to execute the reel effect.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel effect is not executed in S191 (when S191 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed. (S192).

  In S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time from the start of the previous game has not elapsed (when S192 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S192.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S192 that the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed (when S192 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs reel normal acceleration processing (S193). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotational speed (constant speed).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S194). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel acceleration control process has been started.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotational speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotational speed (constant speed) (S195).

  In S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached the predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S195 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S195.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S195 that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S195 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs constant speed start command generation / storage processing. (S196). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The constant speed start command includes a parameter indicating that the rotational speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotational speed (constant speed).

  After the process of S196, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start process, and moves the process to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, returning to the process of S191 again, when it is determined in S191 that the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect (when S191 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect execution process (S197). Details of the reel effect execution time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. After the process of S197, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start process, and moves the process to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed in S192 during the reel rotation start process. If the wait time has not elapsed, the reel acceleration is performed. The wait state is maintained without starting the process. This process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed, and if the wait time has not elapsed, means for not starting the reel rotation operation. Also serves as (weight execution means).

[Reel production process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the reel effect execution time process performed in S197 during the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 94) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the notification wait time (2000 msec) in the timer (S201). Note that the timer subtraction process (count process) for counting the notification wait time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has passed (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time from the start of the previous game has not elapsed (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S202.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S202 that the wait time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (effect start) generation and storage process ( S203). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  An effect instruction parameter indicating the start of execution of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect) is set in the effect instruction command generated by this processing. Specifically, in the production instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG. 80, the production instruction parameters are 01H (production game stop 7, 8 start), 03H (production game stop 5 (second half), 6 start), 07H. Depending on the effect pattern to be executed, one of (stop game start 2 for effect), 09H (start game stop 1 for effect), 0CH (start game stop 4 for effect) and 0EH (start game stop 3 for effect) Set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock process (S204). When the reel lock (“short lock”, “freeze A”, “freeze B”, “short lock + freeze A” or “short lock + freeze B”) is determined by the reel lock lottery, The CPU 51 performs the determined reel lock execution process. Details of the reel lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (pseudo rotation start) generation and storage process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  In the production instruction command generated in this process, an production instruction parameter indicating the start of the pseudo rotation operation of the reel in the pseudo bonus start spinning production is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 0BH (pseudo rotation start) is set as the effect instruction parameter. If the reel effect is an effect with a short lock (long weight effect), a rotation start sound is generated at the timing when the effect instruction command generated in S205 is received by the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets reel stop preparation data (S206). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets execution data for the stop preparation operation 1 described above. Specifically, during the rotation of the reel, the relative positional relationship between the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C and the symbol “red 7” of the right reel 3R, or the left The rotational speed of each reel is adjusted so that the relative positional relationship between the symbol “red 7” of the reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “BAR” of the right reel 3R becomes a predetermined positional relationship. Data for fine adjustment is set. This data is appropriately changed according to the automatic stop effect pattern of the set reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect control process in preparation for stopping (S207). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “red 7” of the right reel 3R during the reel rotation based on the data set in S206. The relative positional relationship of “red 7” or the relative positional relationship of the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “BAR” of the right reel 3R is a predetermined position. The rotation operation of each reel is controlled so that the relationship is established.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the notification wait time (2000 msec) has elapsed (S208). That is, the main CPU 51 performs the process of the stop preparation operation 2 described above.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S208 that the notification wait time has not elapsed (when S208 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S208. If a long freeze such as freeze A or freeze B is executed in the reel lock process of S204, S208 is automatically determined as YES.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S208 that the notification wait time has elapsed (when S208 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel automatic stop process (S209). In this process, the reel automatic stop control process is performed based on the reel stop effect pattern (reel automatic stop effect stop pattern) in the set pseudo bonus start spinning effect. Details of the reel automatic stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus display process (S210). In this process, when the symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus is automatically stopped, a waiting time for executing various effects performed by the control of the sub-control circuit 42 is set. Details of the pseudo bonus display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus initialization process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a process of outputting a pseudo bonus start signal (external signal) to the external terminal board 18S, a pseudo bonus winning lock process, a reel effect stop process, and the like. The details of the pseudo bonus initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs normal acceleration restart processing (S212). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotational speed (constant speed).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (rotation restart) generation and storage process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  It should be noted that an effect instruction parameter indicating that the pseudo bonus start spinning effect has ended and the normal acceleration process has been resumed is set in the effect instruction command generated by this process. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 10H (resumption of rotation) is set as the effect instruction parameter. That is, in the unit game in which the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is executed, at the start of the normal acceleration process, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter (10H) of “restart rotation” is set instead of the reel rotation start command. It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a reel rotation start command may be transmitted before or after transmission of the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter (10H) of “resumption of rotation” is set. In this case, a reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed before or after the process of S214.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotational speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotational speed (constant speed) (S214).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S214 that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached the predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S214 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S214.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S214 that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S214 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs constant speed start command generation / storage processing. (S215). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the process of S215, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect execution time process and also ends the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 94).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect execution time process (pseudo bonus start spinning effect execution process) process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means (display sequence effect executing means, effect executing means) for executing a pseudo bonus start spinning effect. In addition, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not the notification wait time in S208 during the reel effect execution process has elapsed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for determining whether or not the notification wait time has elapsed (elapsed time determination means).

[Reel lock processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the reel lock process performed in S204 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the short lock flag is on (S221).

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is not in the ON state (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S226 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S221 that the short lock flag is on (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a lock time for short lock (for example, 1000 msec) (S222). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the execution time of the short lock is performed in the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock time for short lock has passed (S223).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S223 that the lock time for short lock has not elapsed (when S223 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S223 that the lock time for short lock has elapsed (when S223 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the off state (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S225). By this processing, the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is started. In the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus winning (start) notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 at a timing immediately before the reel acceleration start process in S225. Is done. Then, after the process of S225, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock process, and moves the process to S205 of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95).

  Here, returning to the processing of S221 again, if S221 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the freeze A flag is on and whether the current game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game). Is discriminated (S226). Whether or not the current game is a pseudo-bonus notification game (start game) is determined based on the production game state. If the production game state is in a waiting state, the main CPU 51 It is determined that the game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game).

  In S226, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S226 is not satisfied (when S226 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S230 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S226 that the main CPU 51 satisfies the determination condition of S226 (when S226 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a freeze time for freeze A (for example, 30000 msec) (S227). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the execution time of freeze A is performed in the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze time for freeze A has elapsed (S228).

  In S228, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze time for freeze A has not elapsed (when S228 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S228. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S228 that the lock time for freeze A has elapsed (when S228 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze A flag to the off state (S229).

  After the process of S229 or when S226 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is on and the current game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game) (S230). .

  In S230, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S230 is not satisfied (when S230 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S233 described later. On the other hand, in S230, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S230 is satisfied (when S230 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the lock time for freeze B (for example, 2000 msec) and the game lock time (30000 msec). (S231). The timer subtraction process for counting the lock execution time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B lock time has elapsed (S232).

  In S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock time for freeze B has not elapsed (when S232 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S232. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S232 that the freeze time for freeze B has elapsed (when S232 is YES) or when S230 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs reel acceleration start processing (S233). ). By this processing, the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is started. In the pseudo bonus start spinning effect of the present embodiment, the pseudo bonus winning (start) notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 at the timing immediately before the reel acceleration start process of S233. Is done.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel rotation start command generation / storage processing (S234). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG.

  If the reel effect is an effect that does not involve a short lock, a rotation start sound is generated at the timing when the reel rotation start command generated in S234 is received by the sub-control circuit 42. After the process of S234, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock process, and moves the process to S205 of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel lock process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for generating a lock (lock execution means, lock effect execution means).

[Reel automatic stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the reel automatic stop process performed in S209 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the set pseudo bonus start turn effect is the all-turn simultaneous stop pattern (S241).

  In S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is not the full-turn drum simultaneous stop pattern (when S241 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S245 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S241 that the reel stop effect pattern is the all-turn cylinder simultaneous stop pattern (when S241 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the all-cylinder simultaneous stop weight time. (S242). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the waiting time for all-cylinder simultaneous stop is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time for all-cylinder simultaneous stop has elapsed (S243). In S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the waiting time for all-cylinder simultaneous stop has not elapsed (when S243 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S243.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S243 that the waiting time for all-cylinder simultaneous stop has elapsed (when S243 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (pseudo stop) generation and storage process ( S244). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect instruction command data generated by this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the reel is pseudo-stopped in the automatic reel stop effect. Specifically, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter in the effect instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG.

  Further, when an effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated in this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets a stop button operation flag corresponding to the reel that has been pseudo stopped to an on state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in the bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel. In the process of S244, all the stop button operation flags are set to the on state.

  Then, after the process of S244, the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop process, and moves the process to S210 of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95).

  Here, returning to the process of S241 again, if S241 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S245). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation control process for one round after the notification wait time (2000 msec) elapses until the reels are automatically stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets data of a reel stop effect pattern (any of pattern Nos. 0 to 27) in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect determined in the reel effect lottery (S246). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel preparation check process generated in the reel stop preparation operation 1 (S247). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the symbol position of each rotating reel is a position corresponding to the reel stop effect pattern.

  For example, when the reel stop effect pattern is a normal stop pattern of “BIG aligned”, the main CPU 51 sets the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol of the right reel 3R. It is checked whether or not the symbol “red 7” is in a state of being aligned in a horizontal row during reel rotation (reel preparation eye). At this point, if the symbol position of each rotating reel is not the position corresponding to the reel stop effect pattern, the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position of each rotating reel is the reel stop in this process. The reel rotation state is adjusted so that the position corresponds to the effect pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (pseudo-press) generation and storage process (S248). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  It should be noted that the effect instruction command data generated by this process includes a parameter indicating the type or the like of the reel that is pseudo-depressed in the automatic reel stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 05H (pseudo-press) is set as the effect instruction parameter, and the type of reel corresponding to the pseudo-pressed stop button (push-down cylinder), Each data of the symbol position (push-down position) that is pseudo-pressed and the symbol position (scheduled stop position) to be simulated stop is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the target reel to be pseudo-pressed has been automatically stopped (S249). In S249, when the main CPU 51 determines that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed is not automatically stopped (when S249 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S249.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S249 that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed has been automatically stopped (when S249 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (pseudo stop) generation and storage process (S250). . In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect instruction command data generated in this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the target reel is pseudo-stopped in the automatic reel stop effect. Specifically, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter in the effect instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG.

  Further, when the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated in this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag corresponding to the target reel that has been pseudo stopped to the on state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in the bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all reels have been pseudo (automatically) stopped (S251).

  In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels have not been pseudo (automatic) stopped (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S248 to change the target reel to be pseudo-pressed. Then, the processing after S248 is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S251 that all reels have been pseudo (automatic) stopped (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop processing, and the processing is performed when the reel effect is executed. The process proceeds to S210 of the process (see FIG. 95).

  Note that the reel automatic stop process described above is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing an automatic reel stop process (design automatic stop means).

[Processing during pseudo bonus display]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the pseudo bonus display time process performed in S210 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is a pseudo RB stop pattern (S261).

  In S261, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is a pseudo RB stop pattern (YES in S261), the main CPU 51 sets a display wait time for the pseudo RB (S262). . In the pseudo RB display waiting period, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo RB are performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S261 that the reel stop effect pattern is not a pseudo RB stop pattern (when S261 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect. Is a high-speed stop pattern (S263).

  In S263, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is a high-speed stop pattern (when S263 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a display wait time after the high-speed stop (S264). In the period of the display waiting time after the high-speed stop, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo BB at the high-speed stop are performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S263 that the reel stop effect pattern is not the high-speed stop pattern (when S263 is NO), the main CPU 51 waits for the effect end time due to the sound effect during the pseudo BB display. Set (S265). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  After the process of S262, S264, or S265, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the waiting time set in these processes has elapsed (S266). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the waiting time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S266 that the waiting time has not elapsed (when S266 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S266. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S266 that the waiting time has elapsed (in the case where S266 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus display process and the process of reel effect execution (FIG. 95). (See) S211.

[Pseudo bonus initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the pseudo bonus initialization process performed in S211 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is a pseudo BB stop pattern (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is not the pseudo BB stop pattern (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S276 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S271 that the reel stop effect pattern is a pseudo-BB stop pattern (YES in S271), the main CPU 51 sets an output request for the external signal 1 (S272). ). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 1 to the external terminal board 18S (S273). By this processing, information regarding the pseudo BB start is transmitted to the hall computer / calling apparatus 100.

  After the process of S273, the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus winning lock time (4000 msec) for the pseudo BB (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process for reserving a pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo BB (S275). By this process, execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the setting of the started pseudo BB is reserved. Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S280 described later.

  Here, returning to the processing of S271 again, if S271 is NO, the main CPU 51 sets an output request for the external signal 2 (S276). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 2 to the external terminal board 18S (S277). By this processing, information regarding the pseudo RB start is transmitted to the hall computer / calling device 100.

  After the process of S277, the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus winning lock time (700 msec) for the pseudo RB (S278). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process for reserving a pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo RB (S279). By this process, execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the setting of the started pseudo RB is reserved. After the process of S279, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S280 described later.

  After the processing of S275 or S279, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the set pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (S280). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the pseudo bonus winning lock time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  In S280, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has not elapsed (when S280 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S280. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S280 that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (when S280 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect stop process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus start spinning effect, and thereafter accelerates all reels to a predetermined rotation speed, and then performs a process of maintaining the rotation speeds of all reels at the predetermined rotation speed. . That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 performs the normal acceleration process of the reel after finishing the pseudo bonus start spinning effect.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (production end) generation and storage process (S282). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  An effect instruction parameter indicating the end of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect) is set in the effect instruction command generated by this process. Specifically, in the production instruction command having the data structure shown in FIG. 80, the production instruction parameters are 02H (production game stop 7, 8 end), 04H (production game stop 5, 6 completion), and 08H (production effect). Game stop 2 end), 0AH (production game stop 1 end), 0DH (production game stop 4 end) and 0FH (production game stop 3 end) are set according to the executed effect pattern. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the stop button operation flag (S283). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag of each reel that is set to the pseudo-on state in the automatic reel stop effect to the off state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is on (S284).

  In S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B flag is not in the ON state (when S284 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus initialization process, and the process is a reel effect execution time process (FIG. 95). (See) S212. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S284 that the freeze B flag is on (when S284 is YES), has the main CPU 51 passed the game lock time (30000 msec from the start of freeze B lock)? It is determined whether or not (S285).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S285 that the game lock time has not elapsed (when S285 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S285. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S285 that the game lock time has elapsed (when S285 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze B flag to the off state (S286). After the process of S286, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus initialization process, and moves the process to S212 of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95).

  It should be noted that the waiting time of S266 during the pseudo bonus display process (FIG. 98) described above (display wait time for pseudo RB, display wait time after high-speed stop, or effect end time due to sound effect during pseudo BB display) ) And the digest process of the pseudo bonus winning lock time in S280 during the pseudo bonus initialization process are executed by the main control circuit 41. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 executes means for performing the lock effect after the automatic reel stop processing (after “BIG aligned” or “REG aligned” is stopped) in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect (notification). Also serves as a start lock effect execution means).

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 stores the value of the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S291). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S292). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S292, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S301, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S292 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S301, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S292 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S293). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the position data of the search symbol and sets “20” as the symbol check count (S294). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storage process (S295). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 69) based on the symbol code acquired in S295 and the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S296). At this time, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23) may be obtained by collating them. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S297). In this process, the main CPU 51 draws priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 69) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to a ranking table (not shown), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each pull-in priority table number. The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority order is set in the order of replay, small role and bonus from the highest.

  If the symbol position is an erroneous winning prize when stopped, “use prohibited (000H)” is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S297. Further, if the symbol position is not internally won but does not result in an erroneous winning even if it is stopped, “can be stopped (001H)” is acquired as the drawing priority data in S297.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired draw priority data in a draw priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S298). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area.

  The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each reel type. Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to this pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table.

  The contents of the priority order pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority order data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority order table number in the pull-in priority order table referenced when determining the pull-in priority order data. The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts “1” from the number of symbol checks (S299). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is “0” (S300).

  In S300, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (when S300 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S295 and repeats the processes after S295. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S300 that the number of symbol checks is “0” (in the case where S300 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S301).

  In S301, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S292 and repeats the processes after S292. On the other hand, when it is determined in S301 that the main CPU 51 has searched as many times as the number of searches (when S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S293 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 100).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not pull-in priority table selection data is set (S311).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S311 that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (when S311 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and the operation stop button storage area. With reference to FIG. 71, the drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data is set from the drawing priority table selection table (not shown) (S312). After the process of S312, the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S294 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 100).

  The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority selection number and the stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set in S311 (when S311 is NO), the main CPU 51 displays the pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number. Set (S313). Then, after the process of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S294 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 100).

[Design code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the symbol code storing process performed in S295 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storing process (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S321). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (cross-down line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S322). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S323). Then, after storing the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storage process, and moves the process to S296 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 100).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (in the case where S331 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S331, and a valid stop button is pressed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S331 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S331 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) is updated (S332). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the value of the stop button non-operating counter (S333).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S334). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S335).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S336). In this process, the main CPU 51 obtains the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the type of stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a priority pull-in control process (S337). In this process, the drawing priority order data corresponding to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S338). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding piece determination data acquired in S336, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 53 (S339). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the planned stop position determined in S339 as a search symbol position (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S341). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) using the acquired symbol code (S342).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S343). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operating counter is “0” (S344). In S344, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S344 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S345). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S331 and repeats the processes after S331.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S344 that the non-operating counter is “0” (when S344 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 81). (Refer to S13).

  As described above, the reel stop control process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (design variation display).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the priority pull-in control process performed in S337 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a drawing priority order data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S351). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires data of the stop start position (S352).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data (S353).

  Note that the priority order table includes the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). )) In order of priority (hereinafter referred to as "priority order"). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding frames to be preferentially applied is determined for each piece of sliding frame number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order “5” of the priority order table, and the number corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding frames. So that In the process of S353, for example, if the number of pieces of sliding piece determination data is “4”, the priority order data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of pieces of sliding piece determination data “4” is stored. Set.

  After the processing of S353, the main CPU 51 sets “5” as the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S354). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times within the range of 0 frame to 4 frames. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S355).

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S356). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires pull-in priority order data of the stop search position (S357).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the pull-in priority data acquired in S357 is greater than or equal to the value of the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S358). In S358, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S357 is not equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S358 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S360 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S358 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S357 is greater than or equal to the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S358 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the number of sliding frames. Update (S359).

  After the process of S359 or when S358 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the priority order value and the number of checks (S360).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S361). In S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S361 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S356 and repeats the processes after S356.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S361 that the number of checks is “0” (in the case where S361 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the finally updated number of sliding symbols (S362). After the process of S362, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process, and moves the process to S338 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 103).

[Third stop effect processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the third post-stop effect processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) to determine whether or not the RB is operating (S371).

  In S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is operating (in the case where S371 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the post-third stop effect process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S16. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating in S371 (when S371 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state. (S372).

  In S372, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (when S372 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect processing after the third stop, and the process proceeds to the main flow. Move to S16 in (see FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S372 that the effect gaming state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (when S372 is YES), the main CPU 51 decrements the value of the remaining pseudo bonus game number by one. (S373).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is “0” (S374).

  In S374, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is not “0” (in the case of NO determination in S374), the main CPU 51 ends the third post-stop effect process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 81)). On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S374 that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is “0” (when S374 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus END lock time (S375). At this time, if the pseudo bonus to be ended is pseudo BB, the main CPU 51 sets 5200 msec as the pseudo bonus END lock time, and if the pseudo bonus to be ended is pseudo RB, the main CPU 51 Set 2500 msec as the END lock time. The timer subtraction process for counting the pseudo bonus END lock time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (S376). In S376, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus END lock time has not elapsed (when S376 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S376.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S376 that the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (when S376 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the normal gaming state to the effect gaming state (S377). In this process, a process of setting the pseudo BB stock cancellation flag to the off state is also performed. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect reservation counter (number of pseudo BB stocks) (S378).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect reservation counter (number of pseudo BB stocks) is “0” (S379). In S379, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect reservation counter is “0” (when S379 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the effect process after the third stop, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S16 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S379 that the value of the effect reservation counter is not “0” (when S379 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo BB stock release flag to the on state (S380). . Next, the main CPU 51 sets the notification waiting state to the effect gaming state (S381). Then, after the process of S381, the main CPU 51 ends the third post-stop effect process, and moves the process to S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Medal payout processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the medal payout process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a settlement operation has been performed by the player (S391). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs this determination process based on the on / off state of the settlement switch 14S. When the settlement switch 14S is in the on state, the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation by the player has been performed. judge.

  In S391, when the main CPU 51 determines that a settlement operation has been performed by the player (when S391 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S401 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S391 that the player does not perform the settlement operation (when S391 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination is a small combination ( S392).

  In S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination is not a small combination (when S392 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation / storage process (S393). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates credit information command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The credit information command generated by this process includes information indicating that the number of medals to be paid out is 0 (payout counter value to be described later = 0), and information such as the current number of credits for medals. It is.

  After the process of S393, the main CPU 51 performs a process of setting a main demo transition timer (S394). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets a predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode state in the main demo transition timer. The predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode set in the main demo transition timer can be arbitrarily set in advance. The main demo transition timer count process (timer subtraction process for counting demo transition time) is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Then, after the process of S394, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout process and moves the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S392 that the winning combination is a small combination (when S392 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the type of winning combination in the payout counter. (S395). The payout counter is a counter that counts the number of medals to be paid out in one game, and is provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when the winning combination is the combination name “C_7 sheets A”, “7” is set in the payout counter in the process of S395 (see FIG. 18).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S396). In this process, the main CPU 51 outputs a payout instruction signal to the hopper drive circuit 65. Thereby, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation / storage process (S397). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates credit information command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The credit information command generated in this process includes information such as the current payout counter value (remaining payout number) and the current medal credit number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the value of the payout counter (S398). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the payout counter is “0” (S399).

  In S399, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the payout counter is not “0” (when S399 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S396 and repeats the processes after S396.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S399 that the value of the payout counter is “0” (when S399 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a main demo transition timer setting process (S400). In this process, the same process as that described in S394 is performed. The count process of the main demo transition timer is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later. Then, after the process of S400, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout process, and moves the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, the process returns to S391 again, and if S391 is YES (if the player performs a settlement operation), the main CPU 51 performs a settlement sound command generation / storage process (S401). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for the adjustment sound command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The adjustment sound command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The adjustment sound command generated in this process is data indicating the start of the adjustment operation, and the sub-control circuit 42 performs a process of setting the state to the adjustment state upon receipt of the adjustment sound command. Is called.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the current credit number of medals in the settlement counter (S402). The settlement counter is a counter that counts the number of medals paid out by the settlement operation, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S403). With this process, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation / storage process (S404). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates credit information command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. Note that the credit information command generated by this process includes information such as the current value of the settlement counter (current remaining credit number).

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the value of the settlement counter (S405). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the settlement counter is “0” (S406).

  In S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the settlement counter is not “0” (when S406 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S403 and repeats the processes after S403.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S406 that the value of the settlement counter is “0” (in the case where S406 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a main demo transition timer setting process (S407). In this process, the same process as that described in S394 is performed. Note that the main demo transition timer count processing (timer subtraction processing for counting demo transition time) is performed in timer update processing during interrupt processing in FIG. 109 described later. Then, after the processing of S407, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout processing, and moves the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the bonus end check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) to determine whether or not the BB is operating (S411). In S411, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not operating (when S411 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Transfer.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is operating in S411 (when S411 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. (S412).

  In S412, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S412 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end time process (S413). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter, and sets the gaming state flag (BB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active BB to the off state. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 90 during the BB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command generation / storage process (S414). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S415). After the process of S415, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, the process returns to S412, and when the main CPU 51 determines in S412 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S412 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines the number of possible winnings. Each value of the counter and the possible game number counter is updated (S416). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning possible number counter or the value of the possible gaming number counter is “0” (S417). In S417, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the game count counter is not "0" (when S417 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the process proceeds to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S417 that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the possible gaming count counter is “0” (when S417 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the RB has ended. Processing is performed (S418). Specifically, processing such as setting a gaming state flag (RB gaming state flag) corresponding to RB to an OFF state, and clearing the values of the winning possible number counter and the gaming possible number counter are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the BB is operating (S421). In S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not in operation (NO in S421), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S424 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S421 that the BB is operating (in the case where S421 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S422). In S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is operating (when S422 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Transfer.

  On the other hand, in S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating (when S422 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the RB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 24). (S423). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets each value of the winning count counter and the gaming count counter to a predetermined value ( “8”) is set. Then, after the processing of S423, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  When S421 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus (BB) is a win (S424). In S424, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus is not a prize (when S424 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S428 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S424 that the bonus is a prize (when S424 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs BB operation processing based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 24) (see FIG. 24). S425). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets a predetermined value (“90”) to the value of the bonus end number counter. Further, in this process, the main CPU 51 also performs the RB operation process of S423.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S426). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S427). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

  After the process of S427, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  When S424 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a winning combination related to replay (replay) has been won (S428). In S428, when the main CPU 51 determines that a winning combination related to replay has not been won (when S428 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S428 that the winning combination related to replay has been won (when S428 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S429). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S429, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, an interrupt process performed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves a register (S431). Next, the main CPU 51 performs input port check processing (S432). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs timer update processing (S433). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting a value such as a lock timer for each interrupt process, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S434). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window unit 4). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the reel rotation is decelerated and stopped. In the present embodiment, in the process of S434, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process of the reel, but also when the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is set at the start of the pseudo bonus, Control processing of the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs command data transmission processing (S435). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S436). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register restoration process (S437). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

  As described above, the command data transmission process (S435) during the interrupt process is executed by the main control circuit 41. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means (data transmission means, main control unit) for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. Various tables necessary for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S501). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous command is received (S503). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that the command different from the previous command has not been received (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S503 that the sub CPU 81 has received a command different from the previous one (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S 512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S512 that there is a message in the message queue (when S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel that has stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers lamp data (S517). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process in S514. Sub-CPU81 returns a process to S511 after S517, and repeats the process after S511.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect registration task is executed by the sub control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the received command data (effect control means, sub control unit). In the present embodiment, the effect content determination process (S514) in the effect registration task is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means for determining the content of the effect corresponding to the received command data (effect content determining means).

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111) will be described. The effect data determined (registered) in the following process is data specifying animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when effect data is registered in the following processes, for example, corresponding animation data is determined, and effects such as video display are executed.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a medal insertion command is received (S521).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the medal insertion command is being received (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a medal insertion command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a determination process as to whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. The details of the medal insertion command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing upon reception of the medal insertion command (S523). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs the effects at the time of medal insertion (bet) based on information such as presence / absence of medal insertion, number of medal insertions, credit counter value, processing result of S522, etc. included in the medal insertion command. Register (determine) data. After the process of S523, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the medal insertion command is not received (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a start command reception (S524).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the start command is being received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 81 performs a start command receiving process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of generating a sub effect flag, a process of determining whether or not a weight sound is output, and the like. The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing when a start command is received (S526). In this process, the sub CPU 81 includes, for example, the type of the game state flag, the type of internal winning combination, the presence / absence of the pseudo bonus winning, the presence / absence of the reel lock effect, the value of the effect timer, the push order navigation And the effect data at the start of the game (at the time of start) are registered (determined) based on the above information and information such as the processing result of S525 (effect flag type, presence / absence of weight sound). After the process of S526, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the start command is not received (S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command is received (S527).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S527 that the reel rotation start command is being received (when S527 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a reel rotation start command reception process (S528). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) the production data of the rotation start sound output when receiving the reel rotation start command. After the process of S528, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel rotation start command is not received in S527 (when S527 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the constant speed start command is received (S529). .

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that the constant speed start command is being received (when S529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs constant speed start command reception processing (S530). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs processing for setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the effective lighting mode. Details of the constant speed start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing upon reception of a constant speed start command (S531). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) effect data corresponding to the effective lighting mode of the stop button set in the process of S530. Then, after the process of S531, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that the constant speed start command has not been received (NO in S529), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S532).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S532 that the reel stop command is being received (when S532 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S533). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs processing for setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the invalid lighting mode. Details of the reel stop command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S534). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect at the time of reel stop based on the information included in the reel stop command, such as the type of stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, the processing result of S533, and the like. Register (determine) data. Then, after the process of S534, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command is not received in S532 (when S532 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command is received (S535).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S535 that the display command is being received (when S535 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a display command receiving process (S536). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines and registers the effect number by lottery based on the type of display combination. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when it is determined at S535 that the display command is not received (when S535 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus start command is received (S537).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S537 that the bonus start command is being received (when S537 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus start command receiving process (S538). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers bonus start effect data. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S537 that the bonus start command is not received (when S537 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S539).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that it is time to receive a bonus end command (when S539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing for receiving a bonus end command (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers effect data for ending the bonus. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus end command is not received in S539 (when S539 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the settlement sound command is received (S541).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S541 that the adjustment sound command is being received (when S541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the adjustment sound command reception process (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a parameter setting process indicating a state during the settlement. Details of the process at the time of payment sound command reception will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the process of S542, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S541 that it is not a settlement sound command reception (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a credit information command reception (S543).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S543 that the credit information command is being received (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a credit information command receiving process (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a payout sound output process, a payout number count process, a settlement sound output process, a settlement number count process, and the like. Details of the credit information command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the credit information command (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the credit information command based on information such as various parameters included in the credit information command and the processing result of S544 (output information of the payout sound and the adjusted sound) ( decide. After the process of S545, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 81 is not receiving a credit information command (S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is receiving an effect instruction command (S546).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S546 that it is time to receive an effect instruction command (when S546 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an effect instruction command reception process (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 81 corresponds to various triggers in the reel effect (pseudo bonus start spinning effect, freeze effect, long weight effect, etc.) based on various information (effect instruction parameters, etc.) included in the effect instruction command. Perform production data set processing. Details of the process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command (S548). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs effect data registration processing corresponding to various triggers of the reel effect set in S547. Then, after the process of S548, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S546 that the sub CPU 81 is not receiving an effect instruction command (when S546 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a no-operation command reception (S549).

  In S549, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is a no-operation command reception (when S549 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a no-operation command reception process (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs, for example, an adjustment sound output stop process, a stop button invalid lighting mode set process, a demonstration effect set process, and the like. The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing when a no-operation command is received (S551). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs the effect data registration process set in S550. Then, after the process of S551, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

[Process when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the medal insertion command reception process performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion number is a game start possible number (three in this embodiment) based on the medal insertion number information included in the medal insertion command (S561). In S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the medal insertion number is not the game start possible number (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command reception process, and the process is effect content determination process ( The process moves to S523 in FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the number of inserted medals is a game start possible number (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to an off state (S562). The sub-demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is a non-game state (a state from the end of the payout process until a medal is inserted). When the sub-demo flag is on, the sub CPU 81 It is determined that it is in a state. The sub-demo flag is set to an on state in a credit information command reception process (described later with reference to FIG. 119). The sub demo flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is currently in the demo and / or power saving mode (S563). In this determination process, the sub CPU 81 determines that the demonstration and / or power saving mode is in effect when the demonstration effect data is currently set.

  In S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not currently in the demo and / or power saving mode state (when S 563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command reception process, and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S523 in the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S563 that the sub CPU 81 is currently in the demo and / or power saving mode (YES in S563), the sub CPU 81 performs a demonstration effect end process (S564). By this processing, the content of the effect is switched from the effect in the demo and / or power saving mode to the effect in the normal state. Then, after the process of S564, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and moves the process to S523 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the process at the time of start command reception performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a sub effect flag setting (generation) process (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination (main small combination winning number) included in the start command, whether or not a pseudo bonus (AT) has been won, and the type, and the number of pseudo BB stocks. Referring to the sub effect flag list table shown in 78, the corresponding sub effect flag is generated. Based on the sub effect flag generated in this process, various effect contents are determined by lottery or the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to perform a reel effect at the start of the current unit game (game) (S572). In this determination processing, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a start game (notification game) of a pseudo bonus based on, for example, information on the presence / absence and type of a pseudo bonus and the presence / absence of a reel lock effect included in the start command. If it is a pseudo bonus start game, the sub CPU 81 determines to perform a reel effect.

  In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is not performed (in the case where S572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the start command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIGS. 112 and 113). The process proceeds to S526.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the reel effect is to be performed (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the weight sound generation condition is satisfied (S573). The sub CPU 81 performs this determination process based on information included in the start command and indicating whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has not elapsed, the sub CPU 81 determines that the condition for generating the wait sound is satisfied.

  In S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the weight sound generation condition is not satisfied (in the case where S 573 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the start command reception process, and the process is determined as an effect content determination process (FIG. 112 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S573 that the wait sound generation condition is satisfied (when S573 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the wait sound (S574). Then, after the process of S574, the sub CPU 81 ends the start command reception process, and moves the process to S526 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the process of setting the output of the wait sound (S574) when the wait sound generation condition is satisfied in S573 of the start command reception process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for controlling the output of the weight sound (wait sound generation control means) when it is determined that the wait time from the start of the previous game has not elapsed. .

[Processing at constant speed start command reception]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the process at the time of constant speed start command reception performed in S530 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets each stop button valid sub flag of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R to an on state (S591). Each stop button valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the player's pressing operation to the corresponding stop button is in a valid state, and when each stop button valid flag is in an on state, The player's pressing operation to the corresponding stop button becomes effective. These stop button valid flags are stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data in which the lighting mode of all stop buttons is the effective lighting mode (S592). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for lighting all stop buttons in blue. Then, after the process of S592, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the constant speed start command, and moves the process to S531 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the reel stop command reception process performed in S533 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the left reel 3L (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S603 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S601 that the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag to an off state (S602).

  After the processing of S602 or when S601 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (S603).

  In S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the middle reel 3C (when S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S605 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S603 that the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (when S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button valid flag to the off state (S604).

  After the process of S604 or when S603 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (S605).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the right reel 3R (when S605 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S605 that the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (when S605 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button valid flag to the off state (S606).

  After the processing of S606 or when S605 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for setting the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel to the invalid lighting mode (S607). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for lighting a stop button corresponding to the stopped reel in red. Then, after the process of S607, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and moves the process to S534 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the sub-control circuit 42 executes the control of the lighting state of the stop button that is executed in the reel stop command reception process of the present embodiment and the constant speed start command reception process described with reference to FIG. The That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (notification control means) for controlling the lighting mode (notification mode) by the lighting lamp of the stop button based on the received command data.

[Processing upon receipt of settlement sound command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the adjustment sound command reception process performed in S542 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets a settlement flag to an on state (S611). Note that the settlement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is a medal settlement state. If the settlement state is a settlement state, the settlement flag is turned on. Further, the settlement flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Then, after the processing of S611, the sub CPU 81 ends the process for receiving the adjustment sound command, and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the adjustment sound command reception process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for setting a medal settlement state (payment state setting means) upon receipt of a settlement sound command.

[Process when credit information command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the credit information command reception process performed in S544 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the settlement flag is on (S621).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S621 that the settlement flag is on (when S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S631 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S621 that the payment flag is not on (when S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the payout number is “0” based on the information included in the credit information command. It is determined whether or not there is (S622). For example, when the winning combination is not a small combination, the information regarding the number of payouts included in the credit information command is “0”.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of payouts is “0” in S622 (when S622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a sub demo transition timer setting process (S623). In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode state in the sub demo transition timer. The predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode set in the sub-demo transition timer can be arbitrarily set in advance, but is the same as the transition time set in the main demo transition timer. Is set. The sub-demo transition timer count process (timer subtraction process for counting demo transition time) is performed by an interrupt process periodically executed by a sub CPU 81 (not shown). The sub-demo transition timer indicates a specific example of the second monitoring unit according to the present invention.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to an on state (S624). After the process of S624, the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command reception process, and moves the process to S545 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S622 that the payout number is not “0” (in the case where S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the payout number of medals included in the credit information command (the remaining payout number). The payout end counter is set (S625). The payout end counter is a counter that counts the number of medals to be paid out in one game, and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the payout sound (S626). With this process, every time a medal is paid out, a payout sound is generated. Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the payout end counter (S627).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the payout end counter is “0” (S628).

  In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the payout end counter is not “0” (when S 628 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command reception process, and the process is an effect content determination process. The process moves to S545 (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S628 that the value of the payout end counter is “0” (when S628 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a sub demo transition timer setting process (S629). In this process, the same process as that described in S623 is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to an on state (S630). After the process of S630, the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command reception process, and moves the process to S545 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  Here, the process returns to S621 again, and if S621 is YES (if the payment is in progress), the sub CPU 81 calculates the credit number of the medals included in the credit information command (remaining credit number) as the payment completion counter. (S631). The settlement end counter is a counter for counting the number of medals that have been credited (settled) and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the adjustment sound (S632). With this process, every time a medal is settled (paid out), a settlement sound is generated. Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the settlement end counter (S633).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the settlement end counter is “0” (S634).

  In S634, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is not “0” (when S 634 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command reception processing, and the processing is effect content determination processing. The process moves to S545 (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is “0” in S634 (when S634 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the settlement flag to an off state (S635).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a sub demo transition timer setting process (S636). In this process, the same process as that described in S623 is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to an on state (S637). After the process of S637, the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command reception process, and moves the process to S545 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the payout end counter during the credit information command reception process of this embodiment (S627) and the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the payment end counter (S633) This is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (counting number counting means) for counting the number of times the credit information command is continuously received at the payout interval of one medal. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout end counter during the credit information command reception process is “0” (S628). In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means for determining whether or not the medal payout process has ended based on the value of the payout end counter (payout end determination means). Further, the sub-control circuit 42 executes a process (S634) for determining whether or not the value of the settlement end counter during the credit information command reception process is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for determining whether or not the medal settlement process has ended based on the value of the settlement end counter (payment end determination means).

[Processing at the time of production instruction command reception]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a description will be given of an effect instruction command reception process performed in S547 in the effect content determination processing flowchart (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start time of the reel effect based on the information of the effect instruction parameter included in the effect instruction command (see FIG. 80) (S641).

  In S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the start of the reel effect (when S 641 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S643 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S641 that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the reel effect (when S641 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for starting the reel effect. Is performed (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 81 changes the reel effect start effect data in accordance with the presence or absence of occurrence of a short lock. Details of the reel effect start time effect data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

  After the process of S642 or when S641 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the end of the reel effect (S643).

  In S643, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the end of the reel effect (when S 643 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S645 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S643 that the state when the effect instruction command is received is the end of the reel effect (when S643 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the end of the reel effect. Is performed (S644).

  After the processing of S644 or when S643 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is when the stop button is pseudo-pressed (S645).

  In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not a pseudo-press (when S 645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S645 that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is a pseudo press (when S645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of setting the effect data for the pseudo press. (S646). In the case of controlling the lighting mode of each stop button during the reel production (pseudo bonus start spinning production) as well as in the normal time, in this process, for example, the lighting mode of the target reel that is pseudo-pressed The effect data for setting the ineffective lighting mode (red lighting) is set.

  After the process of S646 or when S645 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo stop of the reel (S647).

  In S647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the pseudo stop (when S647 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S649 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S647 that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is a pseudo stop (when S647 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process for setting the effect data for the pseudo stop. (S648).

  After the processing of S648 or when S647 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of pseudo rotation of the reel (S649).

  In S649, when the sub CPU81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the time of starting the pseudo rotation (when S649 is NO), the sub CPU81 performs the process of S651 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S649 that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of pseudo rotation (when S649 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for starting the pseudo rotation. (S650).

  After the processing of S650 or when S649 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is when the rotation of the reel is resumed (S651).

  In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not at the time of resuming the rotation (when S651 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command, and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S548 of the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S651 that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when rotation is resumed (when S651 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing for setting effect data for rotation restart. (S652). Then, after the process of S652, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command, and moves the process to S548 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Reel production start effect data set processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the reel effect start time effect data setting process performed in S642 in the effect instruction command reception process flowchart (see FIG. 120).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel effect is a short lock occurrence effect based on the value of the effect instruction parameter included in the effect instruction command (S661).

  In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is a short lock occurrence effect (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a setting process of effect data for starting when a short lock occurs (S662). . In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the rotation start sound, for example. Then, after the process of S662, the sub CPU 81 ends the process of setting the effect data for starting the reel effect, and moves the process to S643 of the process at the time of receiving the instruction command (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S661 that the reel effect is not a short lock occurrence effect (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a setting process of effect data for starting when no short lock occurs ( S663). Then, after the processing of S663, the sub CPU 81 ends the setting process of the effect data for starting the reel effect, and moves the process to S643 of the effect instruction command reception process (see FIG. 120).

  As described above, the sub-control circuit 42 executes control of the reel effect start time effect data setting process of the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means (effect control means) for controlling the execution of the rotation start sound output (specific effect).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process at the time of no-operation command reception performed in S550 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is in the state of settlement, the number of credits is “0”, and the settlement sound is being output (S671). In this process, if the settlement flag is on, the settlement end counter value is “0”, and the settlement sound output is set, the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S671 is Judge that it is satisfied.

  In S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S671 is not satisfied (when S671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S673 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S671 that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied (in the case of YES determination in S671), the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the adjustment sound (S672).

  After the processing of S672 or when S671 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an operation input other than the stop operation based on the information included in the no-operation command (S673).

  In S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no operation input other than the stop operation (in the case where S673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S683 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S673 that there is an operation input other than the stop operation (when S673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the left stop button valid flag is in an ON state. (S674).

  In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left stop button valid flag is not on (when S 674 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S677 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S674 that the left stop button valid flag is in the on state (when S674 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag in the off state (S675). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for changing the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L to the invalid lighting mode (S676). By this processing, the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the process of S676 or when S674 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the middle stop button valid flag is on (S677).

  In S677, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the middle stop button valid flag is not in the on state (when S 677 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S680 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S677 that the middle stop button valid flag is in the on state (when S677 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button valid flag in the off state (S678). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for changing the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C to the invalid lighting mode (S679). By this processing, the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the processing of S679 or when S677 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the right stop button valid flag is in an on state (S680).

  In S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right stop button valid flag is not in an on state (when S 680 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S683 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S680 that the right stop button valid flag is on (when S680 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button valid flag to the off state (S681). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for setting the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R to the invalid lighting mode (S682). By this processing, the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the processing of S682, or when S673 or S680 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub demo flag is on (S683). In S683, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo flag is not on (when S 683 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command reception process, and the process is determined as an effect content determination process (FIGS. 112 and 112). 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in step S683 that the sub demo flag is on (in the case where S683 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub demo transition timer is “0” (S684). .

  In S684, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub-demo transition timer is not “0” (in the case where S 684 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command reception process, and the process is effect content determination process (FIG. 112 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo transition timer is “0” in S 684 (when S 684 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets demo effect data (S 685). By this process, an effect for the demonstration and / or power saving mode state (a specific effect process for the non-game state) is started. After the process of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command reception process, and moves the process to S551 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, in the no-operation command reception process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the state of settlement, the number of credits is “0”, and the settlement sound is being output. The determination process (S671) is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means (settlement state determination means) for determining whether or not the determination condition of S671 is satisfied. Further, in the process at the time of receiving the no-operation command, when it is determined that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied, the process of setting the output stop of the adjusted sound (S672) is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 stops the execution of the effect indicating the adjustment operation of the medal (game medium) when the determination condition of S671 is satisfied (payment effect stop). Means).

  Further, as described above, the sub-control circuit 42 executes the process of determining whether or not the sub-demo transition timer during the no-operation command reception process of this embodiment is “0” (S 684). That is, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines whether or not to perform a specific effect process for the demo and / or power saving mode state (for non-game state) based on the monitoring result by the sub demo transition timer. It also serves as means for determining (second non-gaming state determination means). Further, the sub-control circuit 42 executes the process (S685) of setting the demonstration effect data during the no-operation command reception process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for performing a specific effect process for the demonstration and / or power saving mode (non-game effect executing means).

<Various modifications>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the game period of the pseudo bonus (AT) is managed by the number of games has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the game period of the pseudo bonus (AT) You may manage by the number of payout, a difference number, etc.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the structural example of the gaming machine provided with AT function, this invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to, for example, a gaming machine having a function in which an AT function and an RT function operate simultaneously, that is, a so-called ART function.

  Further, in the present invention, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the sub control circuit 42 in the above embodiment may be performed in the main control circuit 41. Further, for example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit 41 in the above embodiment may be performed in the sub control circuit 42.

<Summary>
[Long weight production]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having an AT function is known that performs AT lottery according to a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-201705). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-201705, the AT can be performed so that the player can win a prize without losing the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  As described above, a gaming machine that performs AT lottery according to a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed is known. However, since the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state is determined by the internal winning combination, in a gaming machine having such a function, the result of the AT lottery is substantially determined by the lottery determining the internal winning combination. become. Therefore, the player can easily grasp whether or not the AT is performed from the determined internal winning combination, and there is a possibility that the player may not feel interesting about the operation of the AT.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with an AT function by changing the operation of the AT so that the player's It is to provide a technology capable of maintaining the interest related to AT operation.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a specific period when a predetermined condition is established;
A notification game continuation determining means for determining whether or not to start the game in the notification game state again after the game period in the notification game state ends when starting the notification game state;
Lock execution means for generating a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in a unit game;
When it is determined by the notification game continuation determining means that the game in the notification game state is started again after the end of the game period in the notification game state, the lock execution means determines whether or not to generate the lock. Lock production determination means;
A gaming machine comprising

  In the first gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the lock is to be generated by the lock effect determining means, after a predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed. The lock may be generated by the lock execution means.

The first gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation,
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means, the notification game continuation determination means, the lock execution means, and the lock effect determination means are included in the main control unit,
The lock effect determination means determines whether or not to generate the lock by the lock execution means in the start unit game of the notification game state, and is a unit within the game period of the notification game state that generates the lock. You may make it determine a game.

  According to the first gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, in the gaming machine having the AT function, it is possible to maintain the interest regarding the AT operation of the player.

[High-speed stop pattern reel automatic stop effect (displacement)]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of performing an operation called “lock” that invalidates or delays a game for a certain period at a predetermined timing during a game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). See the official gazette). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, a reel action is executed in which 7 symbols are aligned and temporarily stopped during the lock period. The reel action with the 7-patterns can effectively inform the player that a privilege (AT) is given.

  As described above, conventionally, in gaming machines having an AT function, there is known a gaming machine for notifying that AT has been given by a reel action (reel effect) with 7 symbols. However, since this reel action with 7 symbols is a monotonous effect, there is a possibility that the player may not feel interesting about the reel action with this technology.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to provide a player with an interest in reel action (reel production) in a gaming machine having a reel action function. It is to provide a technology capable of improving the quality.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means including a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols necessary for a game, and based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, variably displaying means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols.
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
When the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the game in the notification game state is performed during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notification game state. Display row effect execution means for executing an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating start on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows;
The display sequence effect executing means is arranged such that, before the specific symbol combination is automatically stopped, the specific symbol combination is arranged on a straight-line preparation line intersecting the predetermined virtual line, and the specific symbol combination A preparation state is generated in which adjacent symbols are shifted by one symbol among a plurality of symbols constituting a combination, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order and the combination of the specific symbols Is stopped on the predetermined virtual line.

  In the second gaming machine of the present invention, the display sequence effect executing means may be configured such that, in the preparation state, a symbol other than a predetermined symbol among the plurality of symbols constituting the specific symbol combination is the preparation. A state in which the display column that is stopped on the line and the predetermined symbol is included is variably displayed, and the predetermined symbol included in the display column that is variably displayed arrives on the preparation line. The display sequence including the stopped symbols is variably displayed again, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order and the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the predetermined virtual line. May be.

The second gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation,
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit,
A plurality of combinations of the specific symbols are provided,
The preparation state may be different according to the type of the specific symbol combination.

  According to the second gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, in the gaming machine having a reel action function, the player's interest in reel action (reel effect) can be improved.

[Pseudo Bonus Start Cylinder Production]
Conventionally, it is a role that a special game is started by a special symbol combination stop display (bonus role), and when the role is won internally, a special role whose winning state is carried over until a special symbol combination is displayed A gaming machine provided with a so-called carryover role is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, a special combination is carried over until a special symbol combination is displayed. Therefore, a special symbol combination cannot be displayed in a unit game in which the special combination is won. Even in this case, after the next unit game, an opportunity to display a special symbol combination is given again. In this case, there is no risk of losing the opportunity to start a special game, and even a player with poor skill can play a game with peace of mind.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a carryover combination is known. However, in such a gaming machine, if a special symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed over a plurality of unit games (games), the player may feel uncomfortable. In addition, there are players who do not want others to know that a special symbol combination cannot be displayed.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to start a special game without causing discomfort to the player regardless of skill. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means including a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols necessary for a game, and based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, variably displaying means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols.
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
When transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, the game operation by the player is invalid after the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means in the start unit game in the notification game state. Display row effect execution means for executing an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating a game start in the notification game state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows during the lock period ,
Notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification gaming state is determined when the transition to the notification gaming state is determined by the notification game determination means;
The display sequence effect executing means includes
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether or not a specific time set in advance has elapsed since the start operation was detected by the start operation detection means;
A symbol automatic stop unit that starts an operation of automatically stopping the combination of the specific symbols on the predetermined virtual line when it is determined by the elapsed time determination unit that the specific time has elapsed; ,
The notification by the notification means is performed at a predetermined timing within the specific time.

  After detecting the start operation of the starting unit game in the notification game state (pseudo bonus state), a specific symbol combination (“REG alignment”, “BIG alignment”) is placed on a predetermined virtual line through the reel rotation start operation. Since the time until stopping usually depends on the position of the symbol that is stopped and displayed before the start unit game in the notification gaming state, it is not constant. That is, the period during which the notification by the notification means can be executed (notification production time) depends on the position of the symbol that has been stopped before the start unit game in the notification gaming state. However, in the third gaming machine, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping a specific symbol combination on a predetermined virtual line is defined as a specific time (notification wait time). ) And make notifications by means of notification within this specific time. Therefore, according to the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to secure the notification effect time that does not depend on the position of the symbol that is stopped and displayed before the start unit game in the notification gaming state.

  In the third gaming machine of the present invention, after the elapsed time determining means determines that the specific time has elapsed, and further after the variable display of the plurality of display columns is executed once, the The symbol automatic stop means may start the automatic stop operation of the specific symbol combination.

The third gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation,
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit,
The notification by the notification means may be performed after digesting a predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game in the start unit game in the notification game state.

  According to the third gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of starting a special game regardless of skill.

  Furthermore, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
Notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification gaming state is determined when the transition to the notification gaming state is determined by the notification game determination means;
When the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, in the start unit game of the notification game state, after digesting a predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game, the player The gaming machine is characterized in that a notification is made by the notification means during a lock period in which the gaming operation is invalidated and before the display of the plurality of display rows is changed.

  In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the transition to the notification gaming state (pseudo bonus state) is determined when a predetermined wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game. This is notified by the notification means, and thereafter, the display row change display (reel rotation) operation is started. Therefore, in the fourth gaming machine, even if the display row variation display pattern at the start of the notification gaming state (e.g., reverse rotation) is increased, the notification gaming state is finally obtained after the display variation display starts. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the combination of specific symbols ("REG uniform", "BIG uniform") indicating the transition to the automatic stop by the effect (stopping while locked). In addition, as in the normal game (when no lock occurs), the display row change display operation is started after the wait time has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, so it is immediately determined whether or not the lock has occurred. This can be prevented. For these reasons, according to the fourth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the effect of notifying that the transition to the notification game state has been determined (lighting effect of the notification lamp) is made more effective. be able to.

  Further, in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention, when the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notification game state, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period, After the notification by the notification means is performed, the variable display of the plurality of display columns is started, and thereafter, a specific symbol combination indicating the start of the game in the notification game state is set to a predetermined stride across the plurality of display columns. You may make it provide the display row | line | column production | presentation execution means which performs the production | generation which stops automatically on a virtual line.

The fourth gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation,
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit,
The display sequence effect executing means includes
You may make it have a notification start lock production | presentation execution means to generate | occur | produce the lock | rock which a game operation by a player is invalidated for a specific period after the said specific symbol combination stops automatically on the said predetermined virtual line.

  In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, a gaming machine capable of starting a special game can be provided regardless of skill.

[Wait sound generation function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that generates a state called “lock” that invalidates or delays a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having a rendering function that performs a reel action by rotating and stopping a reel during locking. In such a gaming machine, an effect using a reel can be performed during locking, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of performing a reel effect during locking is known. However, since the game operation in the locked state is not an actual game operation but a pseudo game operation, if the player recognizes that the game is in the locked state, the player's interest in such effects will be reduced. There was a fear.

  The present invention has been made to solve the fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that makes it difficult for a player to recognize that the player is locked. .

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
When the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the game in the notification game state is performed during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notification game state. Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect indicating start;
Voice output means for outputting a predetermined voice,
In a game in which the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, if the predetermined weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, the predetermined weight time has elapsed by the audio output means. A gaming machine, wherein a waiting sound indicating that there is no output is output, and the weighting sound is not output when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game.

In the fifth gaming machine of the present invention,
It is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed, and when the predetermined wait time has not elapsed, weight execution means for not starting the variable display of the plurality of display columns,
When the weight execution means determines that the predetermined wait time has not elapsed, a wait sound generation control means for controlling the output of the wait sound may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the fifth gaming machine of the present invention, when the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notification game state, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period, The effect executing means executes an effect of automatically stopping a specific symbol combination indicating the start of the game in the notification game state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display columns, and then the game state is You may make it transfer to the said alerting | reporting game state.

  According to the fifth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it can be made difficult to recognize that the player is locked.

[Control function of lighting mode of stop button]
A gaming machine generally includes a main control unit that performs control such as reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that performs AT control described above, for example. Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs AT lottery in the sub-control unit based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit (see, for example, JP 2011-254920 A). In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the processing load of the control unit can be distributed.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine in which an auxiliary control unit performs AT lottery based on a received command is known. However, since the AT is a function that affects the game play performance of the gaming machine, it is required to be controlled by the main control unit.

  Normally, an inspection is performed on the gaming machine to determine whether or not the gaming machine is properly installed in the amusement hall. However, the capacity of the main control unit is limited for the convenience of the inspection. There were certain restrictions. Therefore, conventionally, various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT described above have been mounted on the peripheral board such as the sub-control unit due to the limitation of the capacity of the main control unit.

  The present invention has been made to solve the fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of processing and data in the main control unit, and to control the main control unit such as an AT. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing various functions preferable by the main control unit.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing device for informing the validity or invalidity of the stop operation by the player;
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game;
Receiving information transmitted from the data transmitting means, and a notification control means for controlling a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data,
When the notification control means receives data indicating that the speed of the variable display of the display row has reached a predetermined speed, the notification control means indicates that the notification mode by the notification device is effective when a stop operation by the player is performed. Control to be the first notification mode indicating that,
When the notification control means receives data indicating that a stop operation has been performed by the player, the notification control means has a notification mode by the notification device indicating that the stop operation by the player is invalid. 2. A game machine that is controlled so as to be in a notification mode.

  In the sixth gaming machine of the present invention, when the stop control by the player is valid, the notification control means receives data corresponding to a predetermined operation other than the stop operation by the player. The notification control means may control so that the notification mode by the notification device becomes the second notification mode.

In the sixth gaming machine of the present invention,
Display row effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect including a plurality of types of pseudo actions by the plurality of display rows during a lock period in which a game operation by the player is invalidated;
A pseudo notification control unit that receives data transmitted from the data transmission unit during execution of the predetermined effect, and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data;
During the execution period of the predetermined effect, the data transmission means transmits data indicating execution of the pseudo operation for each pseudo operation,
When the pseudo notification control means receives data indicating that the rotational speed of the variable display of the display sequence has reached a specific speed during the execution period of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control means Control so that the notification mode by the device becomes the first notification mode,
When the pseudo notification control means receives data indicating that a pseudo stop operation has been performed on the display row being variably displayed during the execution period of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control means The notification mode by the notification device may be controlled to be the second notification mode.

  According to the sixth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing and data in the main control unit and execute various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT in the main control unit. Can be possible.

[Generation mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
A gaming machine generally includes a main control unit that performs control such as reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. Conventionally, a gaming machine in which the sub control unit performs effect control based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit is known (see, for example, JP 2011-254920 A). In the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various triggers of the gaming operation controlled by the main control unit.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect according to various triggers of gaming operations is known. Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that produces an effect (rotation start sound) with the start of rotation of the reel is known. In this technical field, there has been a demand for the development of a gaming machine that can execute a new effect using this effect.

  The present invention has been made to meet the above sixth problem, and a sixth object of the present invention is a game capable of performing a new effect using the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation. Is to provide a machine.

  In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
A lock effect execution means capable of executing an effect of generating a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in a unit game;
A variation start effect executing means for performing a specific effect indicating the start of the variable display at the start of variable display of the plurality of display rows;
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game;
Production control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, and controlling execution of the specific effect by the variation start time effect execution means based on the received data,
In a game in which an effect for generating a specific lock by the lock effect executing means does not occur, after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed, the effect control means displays the change display of the display sequence. When the data indicating the start is received, the variation start time effect executing means executes the specific effect,
In a game in which an effect of generating the specific lock by the lock effect execution means is performed after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed, the effect control means starts the specific lock When the data indicating is received, the variation start time effect executing means executes the specific effect.

Further, in the seventh gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect is an effect of generating a sound indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display of the plurality of display rows.
The execution timing of the specific effect in the game where the effect that generates the specific lock is performed is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect in the game that does not generate the effect that generates the specific lock. Good.

  According to the seventh gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to perform a new effect using the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation.

[Generation and transmission function of production instruction command]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that generates a state called “lock” that invalidates or delays a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having a rendering function that performs a reel action by rotating and stopping a reel during locking. In such a gaming machine, an effect using a reel can be performed during locking, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  As described above, a gaming machine having a function of performing a reel effect while being locked is conventionally known. In general, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that performs control such as reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. The reel effect is usually controlled by the main control unit. That is, the reel operation control in the reel production is performed by the main control unit, and other productions using, for example, a liquid crystal display device are performed by the sub control unit. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that even if other effects are executed in correspondence with the operation of the reel in the reel effect, a deviation occurs between the two effects.

  The present invention has been made to solve the seventh problem described above. The seventh object of the present invention is to control the reel operation during the reel production controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. It is to provide a gaming machine that can further suppress the deviation from the production.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
A display sequence effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a plurality of types of pseudo actions by the plurality of display sequences during a lock period in which a game operation by a player is invalidated;
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game;
Effect control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, and controlling execution of effects corresponding to the received data,
During the execution period of the presentation by the display row presentation execution means, the data transmission means transmits data indicating execution of the pseudo action for each pseudo action. .

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
A display sequence effect execution means capable of executing an effect including an execution operation of a pseudo stop operation for the display sequence during pseudo variation display during a lock period in which a game operation by the player is invalidated;
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game;
Effect control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, and controlling execution of effects corresponding to the received data,
In the execution period of the effect by the display sequence effect executing means, when the pseudo stop operation is executed, the data transmitting means transmits data indicating that the pseudo stop operation has been performed. A featured gaming machine.

In the eighth and ninth gaming machines of the present invention,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
When the notification game determination unit determines to shift to the notification game state, the display row effect execution unit may execute the effect in the start unit game in the notification game state.

  According to the eighth and ninth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to further suppress the deviation between the reel operation during the reel effect controlled by the main control unit and the effect controlled by the sub control unit. it can.

[Sub effect flag generation function]
Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) has been developed (for example, JP 2011-254920 A). reference).

  By providing the AT function as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, it is possible for the player to expect an increase in the number of balls with elements other than the bonus. Spread and enhance the fun of the game.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, an effect is produced by an effect device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) according to an internal winning combination. However, if an effect according to the success or failure of an AT is attempted, a parameter referred to in effect determination There has been a problem that processing has become complicated and the amount of data has increased.

  The present invention has been made to solve the eighth problem described above, and an eighth object of the present invention is to simplify the structure (processing contents, data amount, etc.) of effect determination including whether or not an AT is successful. A gaming machine that can be realized with a configuration.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
Data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means, and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means;
Receiving the data transmitted from the data transmission means, and providing the production content determination means for determining the content of the production based on the received data,
The effect content determination means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determination means received from the data transmission means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determination means, and the type of the internal winning combination And a presence / absence of transition to the notification gaming state is generated, and the content of the effect is determined based on the effect parameter.

  In the tenth gaming machine of the present invention, when the transition to the notification gaming state is determined by the notification gaming determination means, the gaming operation by the player is invalidated in the starting unit game of the notification gaming state. During the lock period, an effect of automatically stopping a specific symbol combination indicating the start of the game in the notification gaming state on a predetermined virtual line across the plurality of display rows is executed, and then the gaming state is You may make it transfer to a notification game state.

  According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize an effect determination configuration (processing content, data amount, etc.) including whether the AT is successful or not with a simple configuration.

  Furthermore, in order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining whether or not to shift to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be executed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established, and stocking a privilege of transition to the notification game state;
Data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means, and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means;
Receiving the data transmitted from the data transmission means, and providing the production content determination means for determining the content of the production based on the received data,
The effect content determination means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determination means received from the data transmission means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determination means, and the type of the internal winning combination And a production parameter that combines the presence or absence of the transition to the notification gaming state, based on the production parameter, determine the content of the production,
Based on the difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game, the effect content determination means determines whether or not the current unit game has transitioned to the notification game state. A gaming machine characterized by judgment.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
When a predetermined condition is established, a determination is made as to whether or not to determine the transition to the notification gaming state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period, and the notification game determination that can stock the privilege of determining the transition to the notification gaming state Means,
Data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means, and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means;
Receiving the data transmitted from the data transmission means, and providing the production content determination means for determining the content of the production based on the received data,
The effect content determination means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determination means received from the data transmission means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determination means, and the type of the internal winning combination And a production parameter that combines the presence or absence of the determination of the transition to the notification game state, based on the production parameter, determine the content of the production,
The effect content determination means determines the transition to the notification game state in the current unit game based on the difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the presence or absence.

  In addition, in the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention, when the transition to the notification game state is determined, the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notification game state. During the period, an effect of automatically stopping a specific symbol combination indicating a game start in the notification gaming state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows is executed, and then the gaming state is the notification gaming state. You may make it transfer to.

  According to the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to realize an effect determination configuration (processing content, data amount, etc.) including whether or not an AT is achieved with a simple configuration.

[Management function of demo migration]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of generating a demo state when a non-game state (a state from the end of a payout process to a start lever operation detection) has elapsed for a certain time is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-150921 See the official gazette). According to such a gaming machine, a demonstration (game promotion video or the like) can be executed in the gaming machine that is assumed to be on standby, which can be used for the operation of the gaming machine. Further, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to set the power saving mode by monitoring the non-gaming state without performing the demonstration or simultaneously with the demonstration according to the production state or the setting of the gaming store. .

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine that generates a demo state in a non-game state is known. In general, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that performs control such as reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. In order to operate the power saving mode function, it is necessary to transmit a command (demo command) indicating that a certain time has elapsed in the non-game state from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention was made to solve the ninth problem, and a ninth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of monitoring a non-game state without using a demo command. Is to provide.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A main control unit for controlling the game operation and transmitting data related to the operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls the rendering operation based on the received data;
The main control unit
First monitoring means for monitoring a non-game state;
First non-gaming state determination means for determining whether or not to perform a specific process for non-gaming state based on a monitoring result by the first monitoring means;
The sub-control unit
A second monitoring means for monitoring the non-game state;
Second non-gaming state determining means for determining whether or not to perform a specific effect process for the non-gaming state based on a monitoring result by the second monitoring means;
A non-game-time effect executing means for performing a specific effect process for the non-game state when it is determined by the second non-game state determination means to perform the specific effect process for the non-game state; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect process may be started simultaneously with the specific process.

  According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the non-gaming state can be monitored without using a demo command.

[Medal payout count function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of performing an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out (output of a payout sound) is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223529). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to effectively produce a privilege (medal payout) obtained as a result of the game.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine that performs an effect indicating that during the payout of medals is known. In general, a gaming machine includes a main control unit that controls, for example, reel operation control processing and internal lottery processing, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. In order to end the presentation of time, it is necessary to transmit a command (payout end command) indicating that the payout of medals has ended from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the tenth problem, and a tenth object of the present invention is to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out without using a payout end command. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of doing so.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
When the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination related to the payout of the game medium is stopped on the determination line across the plurality of display rows by the internal winning combination means, the number of games corresponding to the predetermined combination is paid out A game medium payout means for paying out the medium;
Data transmitting means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that one game medium has been paid out each time one game medium is paid out by the game medium payout means;
A payout number counting means for receiving the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmitting means and counting the number of times the payout execution data is received;
A gaming machine comprising: a payout end determining means for determining whether or not a payout number of game media corresponding to the predetermined combination has been paid out based on a counting result by the payout number counting means.

In the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention,
A main control unit for controlling the game operation and transmitting data related to the operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls the rendering operation based on the received data;
A payout effect executing means for performing an effect indicating a payout operation of the game medium when the payout end determining means determines that the payout number of game media corresponding to the predetermined combination has not been paid out; You may do it.

  Furthermore, in the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the effect by the payout time effect executing means may be an effect of generating a sound indicating a payout operation of the game medium.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out without using a payout end command.

[Medal settlement function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine having a function of performing an effect indicating that a medal is being settled (outputting a settlement sound) while the medal is being settled (see, for example, JP-A-2006-034438). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effective effect when the medals obtained as a result of the game are settled.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine that performs an effect indicating that during the settlement of medals is known. In general, a gaming machine includes a main control unit that controls, for example, reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. In order to end the production, it is necessary to transmit a command (payout end command) indicating that the medal payout (settlement) has ended to the sub-control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the eleventh problem, and an eleventh object of the present invention is to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being settled without using a payout end command. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of doing so.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
Game medium storage means for storing excess game media;
A settlement operation detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of a settlement operation of the game media stored by the player;
Game medium payout means for paying out stored game media one by one when the payment operation detection means detects a payment operation;
When the settlement operation detecting means detects the settlement operation of the game medium, the settlement start data indicating the settlement start of the game medium is transmitted, and one game medium is paid out each time the game medium dispensing means is paid out. Data transmitting means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that the game medium has been paid out;
When the settlement start data transmitted from the data transmission unit is received, a settlement state setting unit that sets a settlement state of the game medium;
A payout number counting means for receiving the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmitting means and counting the number of times the payout execution data is received;
A settlement end determination means for determining whether or not all of the stored game media are paid out based on a counting result by the payout number counting means;
When the game medium checkout state is set, and the checkout completion determination means determines that all the stored game media are not paid out, the game medium checkout operation is shown. A game machine comprising: an adjustment execution means for performing adjustment.

In the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention,
A main control unit for controlling the game operation and transmitting data related to the operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives the data transmitted from the main control unit and controls the production operation based on the received data, and the production by the settlement-time production execution means performs the settlement operation of the game medium. You may make it be the production | generation which produces the audio | voice to show.

In the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention,
A state in which the state of payment of the game media is set, a state in which an effect indicating the payment operation of the game media is being executed, and a state in which all of the stored game media are paid out A checkout state determination means for determining whether or not a condition of
When the payment state determination means determines that the condition is satisfied, the adjustment state stop means for stopping execution of the effect indicating the payment operation of the game medium may be provided.

  According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being settled without using a payout end command.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window part, 10 ... Front panel, 11 ... Display device, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 18S ... External terminal board, 21 ... Lamp group, 20L, 20R ... Speaker, 31 ... Main control board, 32 ... Sub-control board, 41 ... main control circuit, 42 ... sub-control circuit, 51 ... main CPU, 52 ... main ROM, 53 ... main RAM, 81 ... sub CPU

Claims (2)

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
An informing means for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
A notification game determination unit capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification unit can be performed for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is established;
A lock effect execution means capable of executing an effect of generating a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in a unit game;
A variation start effect executing means for performing a specific effect indicating the start of the variable display at the start of variable display of the plurality of display rows;
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game;
Production control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, and controlling execution of the specific effect by the variation start time effect execution means based on the received data,
In a game in which an effect for generating a specific lock by the lock effect executing means does not occur, after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed, the effect control means displays the change display of the display sequence. When the data indicating the start is received, the variation start time effect executing means executes the specific effect,
In a game in which an effect of generating the specific lock by the lock effect execution means is performed after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game is consumed, the effect control means starts the specific lock When the data indicating is received, the variation start time effect executing means executes the specific effect. The specific effect is an effect of generating a sound indicating the start of variation display at the start of variation display of the plurality of display rows,
The execution timing of the specific effect in a game in which an effect that generates the specific lock is performed is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect in a game that does not generate the effect that generates the specific lock. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images